Use dlsym to check if libdl is needed for plugin
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
219d1afa 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
219d1afa 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
219d1afa 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
144@ifset M68HC11
145* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
146@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
147@ifset HPPA
148* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
833794fc
MR
153@ifset MIPS
154* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
155@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
156@ifset POWERPC
157* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
159@ifset POWERPC64
160* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
162@ifset S/390
163* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
164@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
165@ifset SPU
166* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
167@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
168@ifset TICOFF
169* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
170@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
171@ifset WIN32
172* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
173@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
174@ifset XTENSA
175* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
176@end ifset
252b5132
RH
177@end ifclear
178@ifclear SingleFormat
179* BFD:: BFD
180@end ifclear
181@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
182
183* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
184* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 185* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 186* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 187@end menu
84ec0e6d 188@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
189
190@node Overview
191@chapter Overview
192
193@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
194@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 195
0879a67a 196@ifset man
0285c67d 197@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 198ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
199@c man end
200
201@c man begin SEEALSO
202ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
203the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
204@file{ld}.
205@c man end
206@end ifset
207
208@c man begin DESCRIPTION
209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 211their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 212compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 213
ff5dcc92 214@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
215a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
216to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
217
0285c67d
NC
218@ifset man
219@c For the man only
ece2d90e 220This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
221@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
222language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
223@end ifset
224
252b5132 225@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
226This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
227to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
228write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
229@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
230available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
231@end ifclear
232
233Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
234linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
235execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 236@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
237(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man end
240
252b5132
RH
241@node Invocation
242@chapter Invocation
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man begin DESCRIPTION
245
ff5dcc92 246The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
247and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
248you have many choices to control its behavior.
249
0285c67d
NC
250@c man end
251
252b5132
RH
252@ifset UsesEnvVars
253@menu
254* Options:: Command Line Options
255* Environment:: Environment Variables
256@end menu
257
258@node Options
259@section Command Line Options
260@end ifset
261
262@cindex command line
263@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
264
265@c man begin OPTIONS
266
252b5132
RH
267The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
268practice few of them are used in any particular context.
269@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 270For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
271object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
272link a file @code{hello.o}:
273
274@smallexample
275ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
276@end smallexample
277
ff5dcc92 278This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
279result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
280the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
281directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
282
ff5dcc92 283Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
284point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
285as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
286which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
287files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
288different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
289occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
290option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
291noted in the descriptions below.
292
293@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
294Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
295together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
296options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
297an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
298
299Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
300specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
301and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
302are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
303message @samp{No input files}.
304
36f63dca 305If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
306assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
307augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
308linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
309permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
310or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
311@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
312script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
313extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
314to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
315the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
316
317For options whose names are a single letter,
318option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
319whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
320option that requires them.
321
322For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 323precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 324@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 325this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 326only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
327@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
328name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
329output.
330
331Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
332option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
333immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
334@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
335Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
336accepted.
252b5132 337
36f63dca
NC
338Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
339(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
340prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
341compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
342
343@smallexample
2509a395 344 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
345@end smallexample
346
347This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
348silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
349may also arise when passing options that require values through a
350driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
351a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
352and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
353the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
354
355@smallexample
356 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
357@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
358
359Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
360linker:
361
ff5dcc92 362@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 363@include at-file.texi
dff70155 364
2509a395
SL
365@kindex -a @var{keyword}
366@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
367This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
368argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
369@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
370@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
371to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
372
7ee314fa
AM
373@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
374@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
375Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
376@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
377specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
378will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
379finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 380it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 381This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 382interface.
7ee314fa 383
252b5132
RH
384@ifset I960
385@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
386@kindex -A @var{arch}
387@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
388@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
389@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
390In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
391Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
392@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
393the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 394archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
395family}, for details.
396
ff5dcc92 397Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
398other architecture families.
399@end ifset
400
401@ifclear SingleFormat
402@cindex binary input format
403@kindex -b @var{format}
404@kindex --format=@var{format}
405@cindex input format
406@cindex input format
407@item -b @var{input-format}
408@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
409@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
410file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 411@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 412that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 413configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 414to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
415default input format the most usual format on each machine.
416@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
417supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
418formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
419@xref{BFD}.
420
421You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
422binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
423linking object files of different formats), by including
424@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 425particular format.
252b5132
RH
426
427The default format is taken from the environment variable
428@code{GNUTARGET}.
429@ifset UsesEnvVars
430@xref{Environment}.
431@end ifset
432You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
433@code{TARGET};
434@ifclear man
435see @ref{Format Commands}.
436@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
437@end ifclear
438
439@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
440@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
441@cindex compatibility, MRI
442@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
443@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 444For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 445files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
446@ifclear man
447@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
448@end ifclear
449@ifset man
450the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
451@end ifset
452Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 453the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
454scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
455If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
456specified by any @samp{-L} options.
457
458@cindex common allocation
459@kindex -d
460@kindex -dc
461@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 462@item -d
252b5132
RH
463@itemx -dc
464@itemx -dp
465These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
466compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
467even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
468script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
469@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
470
7ee314fa
AM
471@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
472@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
473@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
474@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
475Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
476@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
477specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
478will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
479option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 480The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 481
252b5132
RH
482@cindex entry point, from command line
483@kindex -e @var{entry}
484@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 485@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
486@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
487Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
488program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
489named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
490and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
491base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
492@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
493and other ways of specifying the entry point.
494
b58f81ae
DJ
495@kindex --exclude-libs
496@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
497Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 498exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
499@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
500automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
501port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
502explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
503option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
504be treated as hidden.
505
e1c37eb5
DK
506@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
507@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
508Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
509should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
510into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
511may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
512used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
513the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
514match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
515command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
516of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
517regardless of this option.
518
252b5132
RH
519@cindex dynamic symbol table
520@kindex -E
521@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 522@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
523@item -E
524@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
525@itemx --no-export-dynamic
526When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
527option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
528all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
529set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
530
531If you do not use either of these options (or use the
532@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
533dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
534referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
535
536If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
537back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
538dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
539linking the program itself.
540
55255dae 541You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 542be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 543See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 544
8b747e1a
DK
545Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
546support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
547the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
548
36f63dca 549@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
550@cindex big-endian objects
551@cindex endianness
552@kindex -EB
553@item -EB
554Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555
556@cindex little-endian objects
557@kindex -EL
558@item -EL
559Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 560@end ifclear
252b5132 561
2509a395
SL
562@kindex -f @var{name}
563@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
564@item -f @var{name}
565@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
566When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
567to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
568table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
569symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
570
571If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
572run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
573the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
574first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
575@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
576in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
577Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
578implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
579machine specific performance.
580
581This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
582will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
583
2509a395
SL
584@kindex -F @var{name}
585@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 586@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 587@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
588When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
589the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
590of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
591on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
592
593If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
595dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
596filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
597found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
598used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
599@var{name}.
600
ff5dcc92 601Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 602toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
603object files.
604@ifclear SingleFormat
605The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 606@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 607@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
608environment variable.
609@end ifclear
610The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
611creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 612
3dbf70a2 613@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
614@kindex -fini=@var{name}
615@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
616When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
617executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
618address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
619the function to call.
620
252b5132
RH
621@kindex -g
622@item -g
623Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
624
2509a395
SL
625@kindex -G @var{value}
626@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 627@cindex object size
2509a395 628@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
629@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
630Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
631@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 632MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
633sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
634
635@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 636@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 637@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 638@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
639@itemx -soname=@var{name}
640When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
641the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
642which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
643linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
644field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
645
646@kindex -i
647@cindex incremental link
648@item -i
649Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
650
3dbf70a2 651@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
652@kindex -init=@var{name}
653@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
654When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
655executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
656of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
657function to call.
658
252b5132 659@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 660@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 661@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 662@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
663@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
664Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
665list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
666If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 667will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 668will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 669
ff5dcc92 670On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
671files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
672and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
673called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
674@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
675indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
676to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
677@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
678
679The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
680specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
681was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
682command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
683archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
684the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
685
ff5dcc92 686See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
687archives multiple times.
688
689You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
690
691@ifset GENERIC
692This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 693if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
694behaviour of the AIX linker.
695@end ifset
696
697@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 698@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 699@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 700@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 701@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
702Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
703for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
704option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
705in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
706on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 707@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
708order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
709how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
710option is specified.
252b5132 711
3aa2d05a
NC
712If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
713prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
714@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 715
252b5132
RH
716@ifset UsesEnvVars
717The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 718@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
719some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
720@end ifset
721
722The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
723@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
724at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
725
726@cindex emulation
727@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 728@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
729Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
730emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
731
732If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
733@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
734
735Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
736configured.
737
738@cindex link map
739@kindex -M
740@kindex --print-map
741@item -M
742@itemx --print-map
743Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
744information about the link, including the following:
745
746@itemize @bullet
747@item
3b83e13a 748Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
749@item
750How common symbols are allocated.
751@item
752All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
753which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
754@item
755The values assigned to symbols.
756
757Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
758involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
759have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
760linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
761of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
762the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
763linker script containing:
764
765@smallexample
766 foo = 1
767 foo = foo * 4
768 foo = foo + 8
769@end smallexample
770
771will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
772option is used:
773
774@smallexample
775 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
776 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
777 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
778@end smallexample
779
780See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
781scripts.
252b5132
RH
782@end itemize
783
784@kindex -n
785@cindex read-only text
786@cindex NMAGIC
787@kindex --nmagic
788@item -n
789@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
790Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
791libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
792mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
793
794@kindex -N
795@kindex --omagic
796@cindex read/write from cmd line
797@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 798@item -N
252b5132
RH
799@itemx --omagic
800Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
801not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
802libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
803mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
804is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
805specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
806
807@kindex --no-omagic
808@cindex OMAGIC
809@item --no-omagic
810This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
811sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
812be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
813shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
814
815@kindex -o @var{output}
816@kindex --output=@var{output}
817@cindex naming the output file
818@item -o @var{output}
819@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 820Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
821option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
822script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
823
824@kindex -O @var{level}
825@cindex generating optimized output
826@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 827If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 828the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
829should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
830option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
831the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
832no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
833of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 834
387dd777
DP
835@kindex -plugin @var{name}
836@item -plugin @var{name}
837Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
838the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
839automatically added by the complier, when using link time
840optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
841wish.
842
843Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
844from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
845@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
846those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
847copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
848based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 849just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 850
26278bb8
UD
851@kindex --push-state
852@cindex push state governing input file handling
853@item --push-state
854The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
855flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
856restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
857
858The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
859@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
860@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
861@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
862@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
863@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
864
865One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
866used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
867listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
868something as follows:
869
870@smallexample
871-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
872@end smallexample
873
874@kindex --pop-state
875@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 876@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
877Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
878flags governing input file handling.
879
a712da20
NC
880@kindex -q
881@kindex --emit-relocs
882@cindex retain relocations in final executable
883@item -q
884@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 885Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
886Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
887order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
888in larger executables.
889
dbab7a7b
NC
890This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
891
4f471f39
RS
892@kindex --force-dynamic
893@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
894@item --force-dynamic
895Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
896to VxWorks targets.
897
252b5132
RH
898@cindex partial link
899@cindex relocatable output
900@kindex -r
1049f94e 901@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 902@item -r
1049f94e 903@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 904Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 905turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
906linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
907magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
908@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 909@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
910If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
911linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
912constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
913
62bf86b4
HPN
914When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
915partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
916relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
917example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
918with input files in other formats at all.
919
252b5132
RH
920This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
921
922@kindex -R @var{file}
923@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
924@cindex symbol-only input
925@item -R @var{filename}
926@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
927Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
928relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
929to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
930programs. You may use this option more than once.
931
ff5dcc92 932For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 933followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 934the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -s
937@kindex --strip-all
938@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 939@item -s
252b5132
RH
940@itemx --strip-all
941Omit all symbol information from the output file.
942
943@kindex -S
944@kindex --strip-debug
945@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 946@item -S
252b5132
RH
947@itemx --strip-debug
948Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
949
a70f34c0
NC
950@kindex --strip-discarded
951@kindex --no-strip-discarded
952@item --strip-discarded
953@itemx --no-strip-discarded
954Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
955Enabled by default.
956
252b5132
RH
957@kindex -t
958@kindex --trace
959@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 960@item -t
252b5132 961@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 962Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
963
964@kindex -T @var{script}
965@kindex --script=@var{script}
966@cindex script files
967@item -T @var{scriptfile}
968@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
969Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 970@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 971@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
972output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
973the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
974specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
975options accumulate.
252b5132 976
14be8564
L
977@kindex -dT @var{script}
978@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
979@cindex script files
980@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
981@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
982Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
983
984This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
985processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
986command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
987@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
988behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
989command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
990the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
991@samp{gcc}).
992
252b5132
RH
993@kindex -u @var{symbol}
994@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
995@cindex undefined symbol
996@item -u @var{symbol}
997@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
998Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
999symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1000modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1001different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1002option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1003
0a618243
AB
1004If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1005into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1006undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1007instead.
1008
1009@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1010@cindex symbols, require defined
1011@cindex defined symbol
1012@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1013Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1014is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1015is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1016and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1017@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1018can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1019
252b5132
RH
1020@kindex -Ur
1021@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1022@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1023For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1024@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1025turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1026@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1027It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1028with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1029be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1030@samp{-r} for the others.
1031
c005eb9e
AB
1032@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1033@cindex orphan sections
1034@cindex sections, orphan
1035@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1036Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1037specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1038
1039@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1040
1041@table @code
1042@item place
1043Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1044the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1045@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1046
1047@item discard
1048All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1049@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1050
1051@item warn
1052The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1053issue a warning.
1054
1055@item error
1056The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1057@end table
1058
1059The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1060
577a0623
AM
1061@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1062@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1063Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1064@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1065missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1066specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1067multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1068input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1069in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1070
252b5132
RH
1071@kindex -v
1072@kindex -V
1073@kindex --version
1074@cindex version
1075@item -v
1076@itemx --version
1077@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1078Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1079lists the supported emulations.
1080
1081@kindex -x
1082@kindex --discard-all
1083@cindex deleting local symbols
1084@item -x
1085@itemx --discard-all
1086Delete all local symbols.
1087
1088@kindex -X
1089@kindex --discard-locals
1090@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1091@item -X
252b5132 1092@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1093Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1094system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1095or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1096
1097@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1098@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1099@cindex symbol tracing
1100@item -y @var{symbol}
1101@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1102Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1103option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1104to prepend an underscore.
1105
1106This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1107don't know where the reference is coming from.
1108
1109@kindex -Y @var{path}
1110@item -Y @var{path}
1111Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1112for Solaris compatibility.
1113
1114@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1115@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1116The recognized keywords are:
1117@table @samp
1118
e6e2dfbd
AM
1119@item bndplt
1120Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1121
1122@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1123@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1124@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1125@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1126Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1127to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1128@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1129@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1130@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1131@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1132Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1133
cd6d6c15 1134@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1135@itemx nocombreloc
1136Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1137dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1138
b8871f35 1139@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1140@itemx nocommon
1141Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1142link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1143
1144@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1145Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1146layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1147using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1148
cd6d6c15 1149@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1150Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1151is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1152This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1153
e6e2dfbd
AM
1154@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1155@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1156Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1157if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1158by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1159@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1160may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1161selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1162these options.
1163
6aa29e7b
JJ
1164@item execstack
1165Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1166
b039ef04
L
1167@item global
1168This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1169the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1170of subsequently loaded libraries.
1171
93ab9c0d
NC
1172@item globalaudit
1173This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1174This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1175setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1176tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1177the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command line options be run for
6c19b93b 1178all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1179
e6e2dfbd
AM
1180@item ibtplt
1181Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1182Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1183
8df93cb5 1184@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1185Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1186to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1187Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1188
cd6d6c15
NC
1189@item initfirst
1190This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1191It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1192before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1193the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1194the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1195objects.
1196
1197@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1198Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1199so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1200libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1201
5fa222e4
AM
1202@item lazy
1203When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1204dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1205the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1206Lazy binding is the default.
1207
cd6d6c15 1208@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1209Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1210
e6e2dfbd
AM
1211@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1212Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1213
e6e2dfbd
AM
1214@item muldefs
1215Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1216
cd6d6c15 1217@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1218Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1219defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1220
1221@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1222Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1223should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1224
1225@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1226Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1227
1228@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1229Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1230
1231@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1232Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1233
6aa29e7b
JJ
1234@item noexecstack
1235Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1236
e6e2dfbd
AM
1237@item noextern-protected-data
1238Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1239library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1240used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1241generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1242module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1243i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1244
e6e2dfbd
AM
1245@item noreloc-overflow
1246Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1247relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1248overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1249
cd6d6c15
NC
1250@item now
1251When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1252dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1253when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1254function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1255called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1256
1257@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1258Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1259
6aa29e7b 1260@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1261@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1262Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1263specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1264relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1265than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1266Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1267
47acac12
L
1268@item separate-code
1269@itemx noseparate-code
1270Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1271specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1272be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1273code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1274
e6e2dfbd
AM
1275@item shstk
1276Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1277to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1278Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1279
04c3a755 1280@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1281Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1282Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1283@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1284
e6e2dfbd
AM
1285@item text
1286@itemx notext
1287@itemx textoff
1288Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1289relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1290@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1291
97a232d7
NC
1292@item undefs
1293Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1294either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1295This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1296
cd6d6c15
NC
1297@end table
1298
ece2d90e 1299Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1300
1301@kindex -(
1302@cindex groups of archives
1303@item -( @var{archives} -)
1304@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1305The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1306either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1307
1308The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1309references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1310the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1311archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1312object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1313would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1314they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1315resolved.
1316
1317Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1318it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1319more archives.
1320
69da35b5
NC
1321@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1322@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1323@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1324@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1325Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1326recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1327and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1328the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1329behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1330so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1331restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1332
4a43e768
AM
1333@kindex --as-needed
1334@kindex --no-as-needed
1335@item --as-needed
1336@itemx --no-as-needed
1337This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1338on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1339the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1340on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1341needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1342emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1343non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1344the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1345non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1346Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1347the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1348needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1349from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1350
e56f61be
L
1351@kindex --add-needed
1352@kindex --no-add-needed
1353@item --add-needed
1354@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1355These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1356their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1357options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1358and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1359
252b5132
RH
1360@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1361@item -assert @var{keyword}
1362This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1363
1364@kindex -Bdynamic
1365@kindex -dy
1366@kindex -call_shared
1367@item -Bdynamic
1368@itemx -dy
1369@itemx -call_shared
1370Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1371for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1372default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1373for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1374multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1375@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1376
a1ab1d2a
UD
1377@kindex -Bgroup
1378@item -Bgroup
1379Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1380section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1381object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1382@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1383only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1384
252b5132
RH
1385@kindex -Bstatic
1386@kindex -dn
1387@kindex -non_shared
1388@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1389@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1390@itemx -dn
1391@itemx -non_shared
1392@itemx -static
1393Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1394platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1395variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1396may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1397library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1398option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1399option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1400shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1401references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1402libraries.
252b5132
RH
1403
1404@kindex -Bsymbolic
1405@item -Bsymbolic
1406When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1407definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1408for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1409within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1410@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1411executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1412the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1413support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1414
40b36307
L
1415@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1416@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1417When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1418symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1419This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1420when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1421to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1422This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1423libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1424
55255dae
L
1425@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1426@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1427Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1428typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1429global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1430within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1431to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1432in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1433which support shared libraries.
1434
1435The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1436scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1437
40b36307
L
1438@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1439@item --dynamic-list-data
1440Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1441
1442@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1443@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1444Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1445is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1446
0b8a70d9
L
1447@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1448@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1449Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1450
252b5132
RH
1451@kindex --check-sections
1452@kindex --no-check-sections
1453@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1454@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1455Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1456been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1457perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1458suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1459allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1460restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1461Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1462force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1463option.
252b5132 1464
ddbb8a31
NC
1465@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1466@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1467@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1468@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1469This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1470by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1471command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1472output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1473input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1474specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1475follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1476behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1477
1478This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1479libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1480mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1481their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1482required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1483the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1484dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1485symbols.
1486
252b5132
RH
1487@cindex cross reference table
1488@kindex --cref
1489@item --cref
1490Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1491generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1492Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1493
1494The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1495easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1496sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1497symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1498definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1499where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1500symbol are listed.
252b5132 1501
4818e05f
AM
1502@cindex common allocation
1503@kindex --no-define-common
1504@item --no-define-common
1505This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1506The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1507@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1508
1509The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1510the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1511of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1512forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1513Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1514from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1515This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1516and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1517duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1518paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1519
7bdf4127
AB
1520@cindex group allocation in linker script
1521@cindex section groups
1522@cindex COMDAT
1523@kindex --force-group-allocation
1524@item --force-group-allocation
1525This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1526normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1527default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1528change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1529command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1530effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1531
252b5132 1532@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1533@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1534@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1535Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1536address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1537times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1538limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1539context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1540symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1541constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1542using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1543@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1544equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1545
1546@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1547@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1548@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1549@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1550@itemx --no-demangle
1551These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1552and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1553present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1554underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1555mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1556different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1557to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1558demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1559is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1560
1561@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1562@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1563@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1564@item -I@var{file}
1565@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1566Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1567generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1568linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1569doing.
1570
9b8b325a
RF
1571@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1572@item --no-dynamic-linker
1573When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1574linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1575executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1576entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1577
a70f34c0
NC
1578@kindex --embedded-relocs
1579@item --embedded-relocs
1580This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1581that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1582is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1583targets.
1584
7ce691ae 1585@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1586@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1587@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1588@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1589Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1590with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1591
252b5132
RH
1592@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1593@item --force-exe-suffix
1594Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1595
1596If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1597@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1598the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1599option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1600Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1601it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1602
1603@kindex --gc-sections
1604@kindex --no-gc-sections
1605@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1606@item --gc-sections
1607@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1608Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1609targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1610performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1611@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1612collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1613implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1614
d5465ba2
AM
1615@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1616examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1617symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1618command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1619referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1620libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1621referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1622the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1623relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1624
ac69cbc6 1625This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1626@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1627specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1628a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1629
c17d87de
NC
1630@kindex --print-gc-sections
1631@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1632@cindex garbage collection
1633@item --print-gc-sections
1634@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1635List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1636printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1637collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1638default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1639be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1640line.
1641
22185505 1642@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1643@cindex garbage collection
1644@item --gc-keep-exported
1645When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1646collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1647default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1648executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1649collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1650Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1651it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1652ELF format targets.
1653
30824704
RM
1654@kindex --print-output-format
1655@cindex output format
1656@item --print-output-format
1657Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1658other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1659in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1660
3604cb1f
TG
1661@kindex --print-memory-usage
1662@cindex memory usage
1663@item --print-memory-usage
1664Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1665the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1666quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1667headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1668parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1669
1670@smallexample
1671Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1672 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1673 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1674@end smallexample
1675
252b5132
RH
1676@cindex help
1677@cindex usage
1678@kindex --help
1679@item --help
1680Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1681
ea20a7da
CC
1682@kindex --target-help
1683@item --target-help
1684Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1685
2509a395
SL
1686@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1687@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1688Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1689@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1690
1691@cindex memory usage
1692@kindex --no-keep-memory
1693@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1694@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1695symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1696instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1697necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1698while linking a large executable.
1699
1700@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1701@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1702@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1703@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1704@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1705Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1706is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1707The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1708behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1709libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1710
97a232d7
NC
1711The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1712
aa713662
L
1713@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1714@kindex -z muldefs
1715@item --allow-multiple-definition
1716@itemx -z muldefs
1717Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1718report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1719first definition will be used.
1720
b79e8c78 1721@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1722@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1723@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1724@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1725Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1726This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1727determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1728shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1729how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1730
903249d7
NC
1731The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1732referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1733an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1734a shared library.
1735
1736The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1737libraries specified at link time are that:
1738
1739@itemize @bullet
1740@item
1741A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1742that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1743resolvable at load time.
1744@item
1745There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1746symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1747
1748The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1749select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1750architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1751appropriate memset function.
1752@end itemize
b79e8c78 1753
31941635
L
1754@kindex --no-undefined-version
1755@item --no-undefined-version
1756Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1757it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1758will be issued instead.
1759
3e3b46e5
PB
1760@kindex --default-symver
1761@item --default-symver
1762Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1763exported symbols.
1764
1765@kindex --default-imported-symver
1766@item --default-imported-symver
1767Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1768imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1769
252b5132
RH
1770@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1771@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1772Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1773files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1774been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1775This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1776errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1777have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1778inappropriate.
1779
fe7929ce
AM
1780@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1781@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1782Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1783library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1784
252b5132
RH
1785@kindex --no-whole-archive
1786@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1787Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1788archive files.
1789
1790@cindex output file after errors
1791@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1792@item --noinhibit-exec
1793Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1794Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1795errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1796when it issues any error whatsoever.
1797
0a9c1c8e
CD
1798@kindex -nostdlib
1799@item -nostdlib
1800Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1801command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1802(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1803
252b5132 1804@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1805@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1806@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1807@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1808file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1809@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1810object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1811object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1812should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1813usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1814name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1815list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1816command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1817this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1818@end ifclear
1819
76359541
TP
1820@kindex --out-implib
1821@item --out-implib @var{file}
1822Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1823the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1824library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1825may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1826behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1827step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1828the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1829
36af4a4e
JJ
1830@kindex -pie
1831@kindex --pic-executable
1832@item -pie
1833@itemx --pic-executable
1834@cindex position independent executables
1835Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1836ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1837libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1838address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1839normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1840defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1841
252b5132
RH
1842@kindex -qmagic
1843@item -qmagic
1844This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1845
1846@kindex -Qy
1847@item -Qy
1848This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1849
1850@kindex --relax
1851@cindex synthesizing linker
1852@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1853@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1854@item --relax
28d5f677 1855@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1856An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1857@ifset GENERIC
1858This option is only supported on a few targets.
1859@end ifset
1860@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1861@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1862@end ifset
1863@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1864@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1865@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1866@ifset XTENSA
1867@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1868@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1869@ifset M68HC11
1870@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1871@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1872@ifset NIOSII
1873@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1874@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1875@ifset POWERPC
1876@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1877@end ifset
252b5132 1878
28d5f677
NC
1879On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1880global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1881addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1882synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1883instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1884
1885On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1886debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1887@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1888This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1889family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1890@end ifset
1891
1892@ifset GENERIC
1893On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1894but ignored.
1895@end ifset
1896
28d5f677
NC
1897On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1898@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1899
252b5132
RH
1900@cindex retaining specified symbols
1901@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1902@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1903@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1904@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1905Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1906discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1907symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1908@ifset GENERIC
1909(such as VxWorks)
1910@end ifset
1911where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1912run-time memory.
1913
1914@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1915or symbols needed for relocations.
1916
1917You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1918line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1919
1920@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1921@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1922@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1923@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1924Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1925linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1926arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1927them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1928also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1929objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1930@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1931ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1932@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1933
ff5dcc92 1934The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1935SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1936@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1937runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1938options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1939gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1940file systems.
252b5132 1941
ff5dcc92 1942For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1943followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1944the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1945@end ifset
1946
1947@ifset GENERIC
1948@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1949@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1950@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1951When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1952happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1953of the input files.
1954
1955When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1956non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1957shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1958explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1959specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1960@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1961either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1962appearing multiple times.
1963
e680a6b6
NC
1964The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1965directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1966containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1967and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
196864-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1969
1970The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1971@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1972supported.
1973
28c309a2
NC
1974This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1975that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1976is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1977runtime linker would do.
1978
252b5132 1979The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1980libraries:
252b5132
RH
1981@enumerate
1982@item
ff5dcc92 1983Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1984@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1985Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1986between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1987specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1988used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1989at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1990by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1991the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1992@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1993On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1994@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1995environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1996@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1997On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1998directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1999@item
a1b8d843 2000For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2001variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2002@item
ec4eb78a
L
2003For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2004@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2005libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2006@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2007@item
252b5132
RH
2008The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2009@item
2010For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2011exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2012@end enumerate
2013
2014If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2015warning and continue with the link.
2016@end ifset
2017
2018@kindex -shared
2019@kindex -Bshareable
2020@item -shared
2021@itemx -Bshareable
2022@cindex shared libraries
2023Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2024and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2025shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2026undefined symbols in the link.
2027
252b5132 2028@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2029@item --sort-common
2030@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2031@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2032This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2033ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2034sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2035eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2036between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2037specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2038
2509a395
SL
2039@kindex --sort-section=name
2040@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2041This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2042patterns in the linker script.
2043
2509a395
SL
2044@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2045@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2046This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2047patterns in the linker script.
2048
a70f34c0
NC
2049@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2050@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2051This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2052.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2053post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2054
252b5132 2055@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2056@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2057Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2058each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2059size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2060
2061@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2062@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2063Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2064output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2065This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2066certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2067cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2068that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2069support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2070input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2071more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2072many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2073
2074@kindex --stats
2075@item --stats
2076Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2077as execution time and memory usage.
2078
2509a395 2079@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2080@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2081Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2082configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2083that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2084
a70f34c0
NC
2085@kindex --task-link
2086@item --task-link
2087This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2088file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2089
252b5132
RH
2090@kindex --traditional-format
2091@cindex traditional format
2092@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2093For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2094the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2095use the traditional format instead.
2096
2097@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2098For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2099symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2100full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2101@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2102trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2103combine duplicate entries.
2104
2509a395
SL
2105@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2106@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2107Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2108address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2109times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2110line.
2111@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2112for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2113@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2114should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2115sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2116
2509a395
SL
2117@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2118@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2119@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2120@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2121@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2122@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2123@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2124Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2125@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2126
2509a395
SL
2127@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2128@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2129@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2130When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2131byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2132
9d5777a3
RM
2133@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2134@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2135@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2136When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2137the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2138text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2139
0d705e9f
AM
2140@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2141@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2142@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2143When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2144model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2145
560e09e9
NC
2146@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2147@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2148Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2149values for @samp{method}:
2150
2151@table @samp
2152@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2153Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2154
2155@item report-all
da8bce14 2156Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2157
2158@item ignore-in-object-files
2159Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2160ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2161
2162@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2163Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2164ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2165when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2166libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2167command line.
2168@end table
2169
2170The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2171by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2172
2173Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2174unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2175can change this to a warning.
2176
1715a13c
L
2177@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2178@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2179@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2180@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2181Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2182supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2183the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2184argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2185
2186@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2187@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2188@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2189Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2190used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2191about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2192is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2193see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2194use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2195symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2196@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2197
7ce691ae 2198@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2199@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2200@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2201@item --warn-common
2202Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2203a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2204but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2205you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2206Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2207warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2208
2209There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2210
2211@table @samp
2212@item int i = 1;
2213A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2214file.
2215
2216@item extern int i;
2217An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2218There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2219variable somewhere.
2220
2221@item int i;
2222A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2223variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2224The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2225single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2226size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2227a definition of the same variable.
2228@end table
2229
2230The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2231Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2232just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2233encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2234a common symbol.
2235
2236@enumerate
2237@item
2238Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2239definition for the symbol.
2240@smallexample
2241@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2242 overridden by definition
2243@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2244@end smallexample
2245
2246@item
2247Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2248the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2249except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2250@smallexample
2251@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2252 overriding common
2253@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2254@end smallexample
2255
2256@item
2257Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2258@smallexample
2259@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2260 of `@var{symbol}'
2261@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2262@end smallexample
2263
2264@item
2265Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2266@smallexample
2267@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2268 overridden by larger common
2269@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2270@end smallexample
2271
2272@item
2273Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2274the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2275encountered in a different order.
2276@smallexample
2277@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2278 overriding smaller common
2279@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2280@end smallexample
2281@end enumerate
2282
2283@kindex --warn-constructors
2284@item --warn-constructors
2285Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2286object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2287detect the use of global constructors.
2288
2289@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2290@item --warn-multiple-gp
2291Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2292This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2293Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2294section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2295of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2296base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2297base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2298bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2299large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2300values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2301option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2302
2303@kindex --warn-once
2304@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2305@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2306@item --warn-once
2307Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2308which refers to it.
2309
2310@kindex --warn-section-align
2311@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2312@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2313@item --warn-section-align
2314Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2315alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2316The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2317is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2318the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2319
8fdd7217
NC
2320@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2321@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2322Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2323
a0c402a5
L
2324@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2325@item --warn-alternate-em
2326Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2327
560e09e9
NC
2328@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2329@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2330If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2331@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2332This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2333
2334@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2335@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2336This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2337it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2338
252b5132
RH
2339@kindex --whole-archive
2340@cindex including an entire archive
2341@item --whole-archive
2342For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2343@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2344in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2345files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2346library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2347library. This option may be used more than once.
2348
7ec229ce 2349Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2350about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2351Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2352list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2353your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2354
2509a395
SL
2355@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2356@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2357Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2358@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2359undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2360@var{symbol}.
2361
2362This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2363wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2364wishes to call the system function, it should call
2365@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2366
2367Here is a trivial example:
2368
2369@smallexample
2370void *
cc2f008e 2371__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2372@{
cc2f008e 2373 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2374 return __real_malloc (c);
2375@}
2376@end smallexample
2377
ff5dcc92 2378If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2379all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2380instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2381call the real @code{malloc} function.
2382
2383You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2384links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2385you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2386file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2387call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2388
6aa29e7b 2389@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2390@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2391@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2392@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2393Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2394(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2395section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2396
e41b3a13
JJ
2397@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2398@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2399Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2400generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2401if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2402
6c1439be
L
2403@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2404@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2405@item --enable-new-dtags
2406@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2407This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2408systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2409@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2410and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2411If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2412created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2413those options are only available for ELF systems.
2414
2d643429 2415@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2416@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2417Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2418close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2419time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2420increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2421value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2422
fdc90cb4
JJ
2423@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2424@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2425Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2426@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2427new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2428the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2429hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2430
0ce398f1
L
2431@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2432@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2433@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2434@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2435@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2436@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2437@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2438@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2439On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2440compressed using zlib.
2441
2442@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2443sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2444DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2445instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2446also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2447sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2448
2449The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2450@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2451
2452Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2453sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2454for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2455uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2456
2457The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2458involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2459default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2460@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2461
35835446
JR
2462@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2463@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2464This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2465linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2466for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2467about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2468
4f9c04f7 2469Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24701021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2471run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2472has been used.
2473
2474The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2475enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2476
c0065db7
RM
2477@kindex --build-id
2478@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2479@item --build-id
2480@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2481Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2482or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2483unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2484@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2485@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2486@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2487the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2488string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2489@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2490is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2491
2492The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2493that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2494unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2495to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2496file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2497string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2498
2499Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2500@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2501@end table
2502
0285c67d
NC
2503@c man end
2504
36f63dca 2505@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2506
0285c67d
NC
2507@c man begin OPTIONS
2508
ff5dcc92 2509The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2510the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2511normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2512use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2513@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2514like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2515symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2516object file).
2517
2518In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2519support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2520PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2521values by either a space or an equals sign.
2522
ff5dcc92 2523@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2524
2525@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2526@item --add-stdcall-alias
2527If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2528as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2529[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2530
2531@kindex --base-file
2532@item --base-file @var{file}
2533Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2534addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2535@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2536[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2537
2538@kindex --dll
2539@item --dll
2540Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2541@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2542file.
bb10df36 2543[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2544
88183869
DK
2545@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2546@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2547@item --enable-long-section-names
2548@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2549The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2550the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2551for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2552fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2553to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2554allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2555disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2556generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2557as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2558with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2559GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2560information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2561option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2562section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2563when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2564image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2565[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2566
252b5132
RH
2567@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2568@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2569@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2570@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2571If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2572do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2573only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2574resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2575undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2576@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2577to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2578warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2579import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2580to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2581feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2582@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2583mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2584[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2585
522f09cd
KT
2586@kindex --leading-underscore
2587@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2588@item --leading-underscore
2589@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2590For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2591in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2592disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2593
252b5132
RH
2594@cindex DLLs, creating
2595@kindex --export-all-symbols
2596@item --export-all-symbols
2597If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2598be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2599otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2600explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2601attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2602option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2603@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2604@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2605exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2606re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2607such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2608@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2609@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2610Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2611not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2612extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2613(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2614These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2615@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2616@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2617@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2618@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2619[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2620
2621@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2622@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2623Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2624exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2625[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2626
2927aaca
NC
2627@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2628@item --exclude-all-symbols
2629Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2630[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2631
252b5132
RH
2632@kindex --file-alignment
2633@item --file-alignment
2634Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2635file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2636512.
bb10df36 2637[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2638
2639@cindex heap size
2640@kindex --heap
2641@item --heap @var{reserve}
2642@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2643Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2644to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2645committed.
bb10df36 2646[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2647
2648@cindex image base
2649@kindex --image-base
2650@item --image-base @var{value}
2651Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2652the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2653is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2654your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2655other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2656for dlls.
bb10df36 2657[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2658
2659@kindex --kill-at
2660@item --kill-at
2661If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2662symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2663[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2664
26d2d8a2
BF
2665@kindex --large-address-aware
2666@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2667If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2668header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2669greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2670or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2671section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2672[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2673
f69a2f97
NC
2674@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2675@item --disable-large-address-aware
2676Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2677This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2678driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2679addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2680[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2681
252b5132
RH
2682@kindex --major-image-version
2683@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2684Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2685[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2686
2687@kindex --major-os-version
2688@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2689Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2690[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2691
2692@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2693@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2694Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2695[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2696
2697@kindex --minor-image-version
2698@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2699Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2700[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2701
2702@kindex --minor-os-version
2703@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2704Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2705[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2706
2707@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2708@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2709Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2710[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2711
2712@cindex DEF files, creating
2713@cindex DLLs, creating
2714@kindex --output-def
2715@item --output-def @var{file}
2716The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2717file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2718(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2719library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2720automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2721[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2722
b044cda1 2723@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2724@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2725@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2726@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2727Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2728@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2729By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2730for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2731execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2732[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2733
2734@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2735@item --disable-auto-image-base
2736Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2737user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2738default.
bb10df36 2739[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2740
2741@cindex DLLs, linking to
2742@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2743@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2744When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2745search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2746@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2747between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2748uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2749@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2750[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2751
2752@kindex --enable-auto-import
2753@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2754Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2755DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2756mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2757[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2758
2759The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2760feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2761
2762Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2763of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2764PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2765
e2a83dd0
NC
2766Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2767data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2768placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2769around a problem with consts that is described here:
2770http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2771
4d8907ac
DS
2772Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2773see this message:
0d888aac 2774
ece2d90e 2775"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2776documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2777
ece2d90e
NC
2778This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2779ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2780allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2781fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2782constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2783multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2784this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2785of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2786the warning, and exit.
2787
2788There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2789data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2790
2fa9fc65
NC
2791One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2792of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2793this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2794
c0065db7
RM
2795A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2796that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2797there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2798a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2799
2800@example
2801extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2802extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2803 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2804@end example
2805
2806or
2807
2808@example
2809extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2810extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2811 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2812@end example
2813
c0065db7 2814For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2815is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2816
2817@example
2818extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2819extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2820 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2821@end example
2822
c406afaf
NC
2823or
2824
2825@example
2826extern long long extern_ll;
2827extern_ll -->
2828 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2829@end example
2830
2fa9fc65 2831A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2832'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2833@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2834requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2835building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2836merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2837between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2838constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2839
2840Original:
2841@example
2842--foo.h
2843extern int arr[];
2844--foo.c
2845#include "foo.h"
2846void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2847 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2848@}
2849@end example
2850
2851Solution 1:
2852@example
2853--foo.h
2854extern int arr[];
2855--foo.c
2856#include "foo.h"
2857void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2858 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2859 volatile int *parr = arr;
2860 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2861@}
2862@end example
2863
2864Solution 2:
2865@example
2866--foo.h
2867/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2868#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2869 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2870#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2871#else
2872#define FOO_IMPORT
2873#endif
2874extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2875--foo.c
2876#include "foo.h"
2877void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2878 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2879@}
2880@end example
2881
c0065db7 2882A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2883library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2884for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2885functions).
b044cda1
CW
2886
2887@kindex --disable-auto-import
2888@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2889Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2890@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2891[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2892
2fa9fc65
NC
2893@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2894@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2895If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2896that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2897a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2898environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2899[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2900
2901@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2902@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2903Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2904[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2905
b044cda1
CW
2906@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2907@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2908Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2909[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2910
252b5132
RH
2911@kindex --section-alignment
2912@item --section-alignment
2913Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2914addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2915[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2916
2917@cindex stack size
2918@kindex --stack
2919@item --stack @var{reserve}
2920@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2921Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2922to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2923committed.
bb10df36 2924[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2925
2926@kindex --subsystem
2927@item --subsystem @var{which}
2928@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2929@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2930Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2931legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2932@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2933the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2934@var{which}.
bb10df36 2935[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2936
2f563b51
DK
2937The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2938of the PE file header:
2939[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2940
2d5c3743
NC
2941@kindex --high-entropy-va
2942@item --high-entropy-va
2943Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2944(ASLR).
2945
2f563b51
DK
2946@kindex --dynamicbase
2947@item --dynamicbase
2948The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2949randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2950Vista for i386 PE targets.
2951
2952@kindex --forceinteg
2953@item --forceinteg
2954Code integrity checks are enforced.
2955
2956@kindex --nxcompat
2957@item --nxcompat
2958The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2959This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2960
2961@kindex --no-isolation
2962@item --no-isolation
2963Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2964
2965@kindex --no-seh
2966@item --no-seh
2967The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2968this image.
2969
2970@kindex --no-bind
2971@item --no-bind
2972Do not bind this image.
2973
2974@kindex --wdmdriver
2975@item --wdmdriver
2976The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2977
2f563b51
DK
2978@kindex --tsaware
2979@item --tsaware
2980The image is Terminal Server aware.
2981
0cb112f7
CF
2982@kindex --insert-timestamp
2983@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2984@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2985Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2986as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2987other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2988will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2989same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2990can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2991that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2992identically.
252b5132
RH
2993@end table
2994
0285c67d
NC
2995@c man end
2996
ac145307
BS
2997@ifset C6X
2998@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2999
3000@c man begin OPTIONS
3001
3002The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3003libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3004all executables use an index of 0.
3005
3006@table @gcctabopt
3007
3008@kindex --dsbt-size
3009@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3010This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3011or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3012entries.
3013
3014@kindex --dsbt-index
3015@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3016This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3017to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3018executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3019@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3020
fbd9ad90
PB
3021@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3022The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3023exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3024
ac145307
BS
3025@end table
3026
3027@c man end
3028@end ifset
3029
93fd0973
SC
3030@ifset M68HC11
3031@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3032
3033@c man begin OPTIONS
3034
3035The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3036memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3037
3038@table @gcctabopt
3039
3040@kindex --no-trampoline
3041@item --no-trampoline
3042This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3043is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3044instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3045
3046@kindex --bank-window
3047@item --bank-window @var{name}
3048This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3049the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3050The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3051paging and addresses within the memory window.
3052
3053@end table
3054
3055@c man end
3056@end ifset
3057
7fb9f789
NC
3058@ifset M68K
3059@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3060
3061@c man begin OPTIONS
3062
3063The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3064when linking for 68K targets.
3065
3066@table @gcctabopt
3067
3068@kindex --got
3069@item --got=@var{type}
3070This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3071@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3072@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3073Info entry for @file{ld}.
3074
3075@end table
3076
3077@c man end
3078@end ifset
3079
833794fc
MR
3080@ifset MIPS
3081@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3082
3083@c man begin OPTIONS
3084
3085The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3086generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3087linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3088
3089@table @gcctabopt
3090
3091@kindex --insn32
3092@item --insn32
3093@kindex --no-insn32
3094@itemx --no-insn32
3095These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3096generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3097or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
309832-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3099used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3100possible.
3101
8b10b0b3
MR
3102@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3103@item --ignore-branch-isa
3104@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3105@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3106These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3107transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3108accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3109is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3110instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3111equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3112calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3113a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3114an error.
3115
833794fc
MR
3116@end table
3117
3118@c man end
3119@end ifset
3120
252b5132
RH
3121@ifset UsesEnvVars
3122@node Environment
3123@section Environment Variables
3124
0285c67d
NC
3125@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3126
560e09e9 3127You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3128@ifclear SingleFormat
3129@code{GNUTARGET},
3130@end ifclear
3131@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3132
36f63dca 3133@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3134@kindex GNUTARGET
3135@cindex default input format
3136@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3137use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3138of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3139@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3140of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3141attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3142this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3143there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3144object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3145BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3146in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3147@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3148
3149@kindex LDEMULATION
3150@cindex default emulation
3151@cindex emulation, default
3152@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3153@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3154behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3155available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3156the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3157variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3158linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3159
3160@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3161@cindex demangling, default
3162Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3163@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3164default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3165a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3166may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3167options.
3168
0285c67d
NC
3169@c man end
3170@end ifset
3171
252b5132
RH
3172@node Scripts
3173@chapter Linker Scripts
3174
3175@cindex scripts
3176@cindex linker scripts
3177@cindex command files
3178Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3179written in the linker command language.
3180
3181The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3182the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3183the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3184more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3185direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3186described below.
3187
3188The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3189yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3190linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3191to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3192such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3193
3194You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3195line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3196default linker script.
3197
3198You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3199to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3200Linker Scripts}.
3201
3202@menu
3203* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3204* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3205* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3206* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3207* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3208* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3209* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3210* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3211* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3212* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3213* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3214@end menu
3215
3216@node Basic Script Concepts
3217@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3218@cindex linker script concepts
3219We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3220describe the linker script language.
3221
3222The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3223file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3224@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3225The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3226purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3227among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3228section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3229in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3230
3231Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3232also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3233contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3234the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3235A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3236area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3237loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3238which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3239of debugging information.
3240
3241Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3242first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3243the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3244@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3245section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3246same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3247is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3248(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3249based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3250RAM address would be the VMA.
3251
3252You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3253program with the @samp{-h} option.
3254
3255Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3256@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3257has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3258information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3259will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3260static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3261referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3262
3263You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3264program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3265option.
3266
3267@node Script Format
3268@section Linker Script Format
3269@cindex linker script format
3270Linker scripts are text files.
3271
3272You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3273either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3274symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3275generally ignored.
3276
3277Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3278If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3279otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3280double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3281file name.
3282
3283You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3284@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3285to whitespace.
3286
3287@node Simple Example
3288@section Simple Linker Script Example
3289@cindex linker script example
3290@cindex example of linker script
3291Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3292
3293The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3294@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3295memory layout of the output file.
3296
3297The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3298describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3299code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3300@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3301Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3302your input files.
3303
3304For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
33050x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3306linker script which will do that:
3307@smallexample
3308SECTIONS
3309@{
3310 . = 0x10000;
3311 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3312 . = 0x8000000;
3313 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3314 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3315@}
3316@end smallexample
3317
3318You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3319followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3320descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3321
252b5132
RH
3322The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3323sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3324counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3325other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3326current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3327incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3328@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3329
3330The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3331required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3332after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3333which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3334wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3335means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3336
3337Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3338@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3339@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3340
3341The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3342the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3343at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3344output section, the value of the location counter will be
3345@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3346effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3347immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3348
3349The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3350alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3351example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3352sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3353may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3354sections.
3355
3356That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3357
3358@node Simple Commands
3359@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3360@cindex linker script simple commands
3361In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3362
3363@menu
3364* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3365* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3366@ifclear SingleFormat
3367* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3368@end ifclear
3369
4a93e180 3370* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3371* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3372@end menu
3373
3374@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3375@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3376@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3377@cindex start of execution
3378@cindex first instruction
3379@cindex entry point
3380The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3381point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3382entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3383@smallexample
3384ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3385@end smallexample
3386
3387There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3388entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3389stopping when one of them succeeds:
3390@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3391@item
252b5132 3392the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3393@item
252b5132 3394the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3395@item
3ab904c4
NC
3396the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3397targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3398check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3399@item
252b5132 3400the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3401@item
252b5132
RH
3402The address @code{0}.
3403@end itemize
3404
3405@node File Commands
36f63dca 3406@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3407@cindex linker script file commands
3408Several linker script commands deal with files.
3409
3410@table @code
3411@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3412@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3413@cindex including a linker script
3414Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3415be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3416with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
341710 levels deep.
3418
4006703d
NS
3419You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3420@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3421
252b5132
RH
3422@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3423@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3424@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3425@cindex input files in linker scripts
3426@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3427@cindex linker script input object files
3428The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3429in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3430
3431For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3432a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3433then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3434
3435In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3436script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3437
e3f2db7f
AO
3438In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3439with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3440located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3441for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3442open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3443linker will search through the archive library search path.
3444The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3445as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3446path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3447@ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3448
ff5dcc92 3449If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3450name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3451@samp{-l}.
3452
3453When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3454files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3455script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3456
3457@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3458@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3459@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3460@cindex grouping input files
3461The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3462files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3463new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3464in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3465
b717d30e
JJ
3466@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3467@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3468@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3469This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3470commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3471as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3472with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3473when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3474@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3475and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3476setting afterwards.
3477
252b5132
RH
3478@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3479@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3480@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3481The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3482@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3483@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3484Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3485precedence.
3486
3487You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3488output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3489
3490@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3491@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3492@cindex library search path in linker script
3493@cindex archive search path in linker script
3494@cindex search path in linker script
3495The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3496@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3497@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3498on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3499are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3500the command line option are searched first.
3501
3502@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3503@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3504@cindex first input file
3505The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3506that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3507though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3508when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3509first file.
3510@end table
3511
3512@ifclear SingleFormat
3513@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3514@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3515A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3516
3517@table @code
3518@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3519@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3520@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3521@cindex output file format in linker script
3522The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3523output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3524exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3525(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3526line option takes precedence.
3527
3528You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3529formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3530This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3531desired endianness.
3532
3533If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3534will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3535output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3536used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3537
3538For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3539command:
3540@smallexample
3541OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3542@end smallexample
3543This says that the default format for the output file is
3544@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3545option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3546format.
3547
3548@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3549@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3550@cindex input file format in linker script
3551The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3552files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3553This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3554(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3555is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3556command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3557@end table
3558@end ifclear
3559
4a93e180
NC
3560@node REGION_ALIAS
3561@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3562@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3563@cindex region alias
3564@cindex region names
3565
3566Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3567@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3568
3569@smallexample
3570REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3571@end smallexample
3572
3573The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3574memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3575to memory regions. An example follows.
3576
3577Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3578memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3579that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3580non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3581access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3582read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3583sections:
3584
3585@itemize @bullet
3586@item
3587@code{.text} program code;
3588@item
3589@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3590@item
3591@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3592@item
3593@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3594@end itemize
3595
3596The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3597part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3598output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3599systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3600@code{C}:
3601@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3602@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3603@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3604@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3605@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3606@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3607@end multitable
3608The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3609loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3610the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3611the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3612
3613The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3614includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3615memory layout:
3616@smallexample
3617INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3618
3619SECTIONS
3620 @{
3621 .text :
3622 @{
3623 *(.text)
3624 @} > REGION_TEXT
3625 .rodata :
3626 @{
3627 *(.rodata)
3628 rodata_end = .;
3629 @} > REGION_RODATA
3630 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3631 @{
3632 data_start = .;
3633 *(.data)
3634 @} > REGION_DATA
3635 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3636 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3637 .bss :
3638 @{
3639 *(.bss)
3640 @} > REGION_BSS
3641 @}
3642@end smallexample
3643
3644Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3645regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3646variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3647@table @code
3648@item A
3649Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3650@smallexample
3651MEMORY
3652 @{
3653 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3654 @}
3655
3656REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3657REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3658REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3659REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3660@end smallexample
3661@item B
3662Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3663into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3664@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3665@smallexample
3666MEMORY
3667 @{
3668 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3669 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3670 @}
3671
3672REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3673REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3674REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3675REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3676@end smallexample
3677@item C
3678Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3679@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3680initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3681system start into the @code{RAM}.
3682@smallexample
3683MEMORY
3684 @{
3685 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3686 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3687 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3688 @}
3689
3690REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3691REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3692REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3693REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3694@end smallexample
3695@end table
3696
3697It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3698@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3699necessary:
3700@smallexample
3701#include <string.h>
3702
3703extern char data_start [];
3704extern char data_size [];
3705extern char data_load_start [];
3706
3707void copy_data(void)
3708@{
3709 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3710 @{
3711 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3712 @}
3713@}
3714@end smallexample
3715
252b5132 3716@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3717@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3718There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3719
3720@table @code
3721@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3722@kindex ASSERT
3723@cindex assertion in linker script
3724Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3725with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3726
fd1c4238
NC
3727Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3728take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3729inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3730for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3731symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3732
3733@smallexample
3734 .stack :
3735 @{
3736 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3737 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3738 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3739 @}
3740@end smallexample
3741
3742will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3743PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3744can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3745
3746@smallexample
3747 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3748 .stack :
3749 @{
3750 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3751 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3752 @}
3753@end smallexample
3754
3755will work.
3756
252b5132
RH
3757@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3758@kindex EXTERN
3759@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3760Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3761symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3762modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3763each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3764command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3765
3766@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3767@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3768@cindex common allocation in linker script
3769This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3770to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3771output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3772
4818e05f
AM
3773@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3774@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3775@cindex common allocation in linker script
3776This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3777command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3778to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3779
7bdf4127
AB
3780@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3781@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3782@cindex group allocation in linker script
3783@cindex section groups
3784@cindex COMDAT
3785This command has the same effect as the
3786@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3787@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3788and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3789specified (@samp{-r}).
3790
53d25da6
AM
3791@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3792@kindex INSERT
3793@cindex insert user script into default script
3794This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3795augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3796inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3797@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3798default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3799sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3800linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3801insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3802linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3803default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3804of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3805to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3806is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3807
3808@smallexample
3809SECTIONS
3810@{
3811 OVERLAY :
3812 @{
3813 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3814 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3815 @}
3816@}
3817INSERT AFTER .text;
3818@end smallexample
3819
252b5132
RH
3820@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3821@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3822@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3823This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3824references among certain output sections.
3825
3826In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3827using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3828will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3829errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3830a function defined in the other section.
3831
3832The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3833@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3834an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3835@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3836names.
3837
cdf96953
MF
3838@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3839@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3840@cindex cross references
3841This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3842references to one section from a list of other sections.
3843
3844The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3845output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3846a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3847there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3848must never call back.
3849
3850The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3851The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3852If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3853the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3854status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3855names, not input section names.
3856
252b5132
RH
3857@ifclear SingleFormat
3858@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3859@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3860@cindex machine architecture
3861@cindex architecture
3862Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3863of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3864architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3865the @samp{-f} option.
3866@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3867
3868@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3869@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3870This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3871@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3872in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3873@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3874@end table
3875
3876@node Assignments
3877@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3878@cindex assignment in scripts
3879@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3880@cindex variables, defining
3881You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3882the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3883
3884@menu
3885* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3886* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3887* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3888* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3889* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3890@end menu
3891
3892@node Simple Assignments
3893@subsection Simple Assignments
3894
3895You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3896
3897@table @code
3898@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3899@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3900@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3901@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3902@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3903@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3904@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3905@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3906@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3907@end table
3908
3909The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3910@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3911defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3912
3913The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3914may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3915
3916The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3917
3918Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3919
3920You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3921statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3922section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3923
3924The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3925expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3926
3927Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3928assignments may be used:
3929
3930@smallexample
3931floating_point = 0;
3932SECTIONS
3933@{
3934 .text :
3935 @{
3936 *(.text)
3937 _etext = .;
3938 @}
156e34dd 3939 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3940 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3941@}
3942@end smallexample
3943@noindent
3944In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3945zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3946the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3947defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3948upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3949
eb8476a6
MR
3950@node HIDDEN
3951@subsection HIDDEN
3952@cindex HIDDEN
3953For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3954exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3955
3956Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3957@code{HIDDEN}:
3958
3959@smallexample
3960HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3961SECTIONS
3962@{
3963 .text :
3964 @{
3965 *(.text)
3966 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3967 @}
3968 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3969 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3970@}
3971@end smallexample
3972@noindent
3973In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3974
252b5132
RH
3975@node PROVIDE
3976@subsection PROVIDE
3977@cindex PROVIDE
3978In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3979only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3980the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3981@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3982@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3983@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3984@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3985@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3986
3987Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3988@smallexample
3989SECTIONS
3990@{
3991 .text :
3992 @{
3993 *(.text)
3994 _etext = .;
3995 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3996 @}
3997@}
3998@end smallexample
3999
4000In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4001underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4002the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4003underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4004If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4005linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4006
b0daac83
NC
4007Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4008defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4009that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4010when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4011@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4012
7af8e998
L
4013@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4014@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4015@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4016Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4017hidden and won't be exported.
4018
73ae6183
NC
4019@node Source Code Reference
4020@subsection Source Code Reference
4021
4022Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4023intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4024a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4025symbol that does not have a value.
4026
4027Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4028transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4029stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4030prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4031mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4032of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4033variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4034linker script variable might be referred to as:
4035
4036@smallexample
4037 extern int foo;
4038@end smallexample
4039
4040But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4041
4042@smallexample
4043 _foo = 1000;
4044@end smallexample
4045
4046In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4047transformation has taken place.
4048
4049When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4050things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4051in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4052second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4053table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4054contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4055value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4056
4057@smallexample
4058 int foo = 1000;
4059@end smallexample
4060
10bf6894 4061creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4062holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4063number 1000 is initially stored.
4064
4065When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4066first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4067memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4068So:
4069
4070@smallexample
4071 foo = 1;
4072@end smallexample
4073
4074looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4075associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4076address. Whereas:
4077
4078@smallexample
4079 int * a = & foo;
4080@end smallexample
4081
10bf6894 4082looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4083and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4084the variable @samp{a}.
4085
4086Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4087the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4088an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4089
4090@smallexample
4091 foo = 1000;
4092@end smallexample
4093
4094creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4095the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4096address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4097linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4098access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4099
4100Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4101you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4102use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4103section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4104linker script contains these declarations:
4105
4106@smallexample
4107@group
4108 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4109 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4110 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4111@end group
4112@end smallexample
4113
4114Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4115
4116@smallexample
4117@group
4118 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4119
73ae6183
NC
4120 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4121@end group
4122@end smallexample
4123
4124Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4125Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4126arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4127
4128@smallexample
4129@group
4130 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4131
4132 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4133@end group
4134@end smallexample
4135
4136Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4137operators.
73ae6183 4138
252b5132 4139@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4140@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4141@kindex SECTIONS
4142The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4143into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4144
4145The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4146@smallexample
4147SECTIONS
4148@{
4149 @var{sections-command}
4150 @var{sections-command}
4151 @dots{}
4152@}
4153@end smallexample
4154
4155Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4156
4157@itemize @bullet
4158@item
4159an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4160@item
4161a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4162@item
4163an output section description
4164@item
4165an overlay description
4166@end itemize
4167
4168The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4169@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4170those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4171understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4172the layout of the output file.
4173
4174Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4175below.
4176
4177If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4178linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4179section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4180input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4181example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4182in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4183
4184@menu
4185* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4186* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4187* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4188* Input Section:: Input section description
4189* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4190* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4191* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4192* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4193* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4194@end menu
4195
4196@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4197@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4198The full description of an output section looks like this:
4199@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4200@group
7e7d5768 4201@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4202 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4203 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4204 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4205 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4206 @{
4207 @var{output-section-command}
4208 @var{output-section-command}
4209 @dots{}
abc9061b 4210 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4211@end group
4212@end smallexample
4213
4214Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4215
4216The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4217name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4218The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4219the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4220The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4221
4222Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4223
4224@itemize @bullet
4225@item
4226a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4227@item
4228an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4229@item
4230data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4231@item
4232a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4233@end itemize
4234
4235@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4236@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4237@cindex name, section
4238@cindex section name
4239The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4240meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4241support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4242must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4243example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4244output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4245names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4246quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4247characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4248commas must be quoted.
4249
4250The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4251Discarding}.
4252
4253@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4254@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4255@cindex address, section
4256@cindex section address
4257The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4258address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4259is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4260
4261If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4262section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4263to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4264alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4265contained within the output section.
4266
4267The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4268
4269@itemize @bullet
4270@item
4271If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4272is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4273in that region.
4274
4275@item
4276If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4277regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4278section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4279be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4280
4281@item
4282If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4283the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4284counter.
4285@end itemize
4286
4287@noindent
4288For example:
4289
252b5132
RH
4290@smallexample
4291.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4292@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4293
252b5132
RH
4294@noindent
4295and
ea5cae92 4296
252b5132
RH
4297@smallexample
4298.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4299@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4300
252b5132
RH
4301@noindent
4302are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4303@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4304counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4305counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4306input sections.
252b5132
RH
4307
4308The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4309For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4310so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4311do something like this:
4312@smallexample
4313.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4314@end smallexample
4315@noindent
4316This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4317aligned upward to the specified value.
4318
4319Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4320location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4321sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4322
4323@node Input Section
36f63dca 4324@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4325@cindex input sections
4326@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4327The most common output section command is an input section description.
4328
4329The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4330You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4331in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4332map the input files into your memory layout.
4333
4334@menu
4335* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4336* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4337* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4338* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4339* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4340@end menu
4341
4342@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4343@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4344@cindex input section basics
4345An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4346by a list of section names in parentheses.
4347
4348The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4349describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4350
4351The most common input section description is to include all input
4352sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4353include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4354@smallexample
4355*(.text)
4356@end smallexample
4357@noindent
18625d54 4358Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4359@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4360of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4361match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4362example:
252b5132 4363@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4364EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4365@end smallexample
4366@noindent
4367will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4368and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4369placed inside the section list, for example:
4370@smallexample
b4346c09 4371*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4372@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4373@noindent
4374The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4375two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4376more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4377
4378There are two ways to include more than one section:
4379@smallexample
4380*(.text .rdata)
4381*(.text) *(.rdata)
4382@end smallexample
4383@noindent
4384The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4385@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4386first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4387they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4388@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4389@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4390
8f1732fc
AB
4391When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4392is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4393immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4394@smallexample
4395*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4396@end smallexample
4397@noindent
4398will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4399@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4400from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4401exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4402could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4403@smallexample
4404*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4405@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4406@noindent
4407Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4408before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4409all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4410@smallexample
4411EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4412@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4413
252b5132
RH
4414You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4415You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4416needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4417@smallexample
4418data.o(.data)
4419@end smallexample
4420
ae17ab41
CM
4421To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4422of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4423
4424Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4425
4426@smallexample
4427@group
4428SECTIONS @{
4429 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4430 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4431@}
4432@end group
4433@end smallexample
4434
4435In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4436input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4437@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4438@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4439whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4440
967928e9
AM
4441You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4442matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4443with no whitespace around the colon.
4444
4445@table @samp
4446@item archive:file
4447matches file within archive
4448@item archive:
4449matches the whole archive
4450@item :file
4451matches file but not one in an archive
4452@end table
4453
4454Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4455wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4456single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4457@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4458within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4459also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4460other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4461from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4462command.
4463
252b5132
RH
4464If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4465the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4466commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4467@smallexample
4468data.o
4469@end smallexample
4470
967928e9
AM
4471When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4472and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4473characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4474name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4475did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4476though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4477@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4478the archive search path.
4479
4480@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4481@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4482@cindex input section wildcards
4483@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4484@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4485@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4486In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4487name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4488
4489The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4490pattern for the file name.
4491
4492The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4493
4494@table @samp
4495@item *
4496matches any number of characters
4497@item ?
4498matches any single character
4499@item [@var{chars}]
4500matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4501character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4502@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4503@item \
4504quotes the following character
4505@end table
4506
4507When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4508will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4509Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4510exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4511@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4512a @samp{/} character.
4513
4514File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4515specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4516does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4517
4518If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4519appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4520will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4521sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4522@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4523@smallexample
4524.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4525.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4526@end smallexample
4527
bcaa7b3e 4528@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4529Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4530in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4531this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4532pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4533@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4534into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4535
bcaa7b3e
L
4536@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4537@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4538difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4539descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4540Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4541reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4542
02ecc8e9
L
4543@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4544@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4545difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4546ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4547encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4548
bcaa7b3e
L
4549@cindex SORT
4550@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4551
4552When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4553can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4554
4555@enumerate
4556@item
4557@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4558It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4559sections have the same name.
4560@item
4561@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4562It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4563sections have the same alignment.
4564@item
c0065db7 4565@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4566treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4567@item
4568@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4569is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4570@item
4571All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4572@end enumerate
4573
4574When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4575section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4576takes precedence over the command line option.
4577
4578If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4579command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4580treated as nested sorting command.
4581
4582@enumerate
4583@item
4584@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4585@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4586@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4587@item
4588@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4589@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4590@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4591@end enumerate
4592
4593If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4594command line option will be ignored.
4595
eda680f8
L
4596@cindex SORT_NONE
4597@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4598section sorting option.
4599
252b5132
RH
4600If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4601@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4602precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4603
4604This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4605files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4606sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4607The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4608with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4609linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4610@smallexample
4611@group
4612SECTIONS @{
4613 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4614 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4615 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4616 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4617@}
4618@end group
4619@end smallexample
4620
4621@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4622@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4623@cindex common symbol placement
4624@cindex uninitialized data placement
4625A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4626file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4627linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4628named @samp{COMMON}.
4629
4630You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4631other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4632particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4633input files are placed in another section.
4634
4635In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4636@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4637@smallexample
4638.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4639@end smallexample
4640
4641@cindex scommon section
4642@cindex small common symbols
4643Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4644example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4645symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4646different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4647the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4648symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4649to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4650locations.
4651
4652@cindex [COMMON]
4653You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4654notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4655@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4656
4657@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4658@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4659@cindex KEEP
4660@cindex garbage collection
4661When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4662it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4663This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4664with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4665@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4666
4667@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4668@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4669The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4670to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4671start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4672@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4673follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4674@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4675@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4676All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4677files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4678
4679@smallexample
4680@group
4681SECTIONS @{
4682 outputa 0x10000 :
4683 @{
4684 all.o
4685 foo.o (.input1)
4686 @}
36f63dca
NC
4687@end group
4688@group
252b5132
RH
4689 outputb :
4690 @{
4691 foo.o (.input2)
4692 foo1.o (.input1)
4693 @}
36f63dca
NC
4694@end group
4695@group
252b5132
RH
4696 outputc :
4697 @{
4698 *(.input1)
4699 *(.input2)
4700 @}
4701@}
4702@end group
a1ab1d2a 4703@end smallexample
252b5132 4704
cbd0eecf
L
4705If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4706and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4707automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4708__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4709indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4710respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4711C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4712
252b5132 4713@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4714@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4715@cindex data
4716@cindex section data
4717@cindex output section data
4718@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4719@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4720@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4721@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4722@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4723You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4724@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4725an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4726parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4727value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4728counter.
4729
4730The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4731store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4732bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4733stored.
4734
4735For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4736of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4737@smallexample
4738BYTE(1)
4739LONG(addr)
4740@end smallexample
4741
4742When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4743same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4744target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4745@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4746@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4747
4748If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4749which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4750When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4751true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4752endianness of the first input object file.
4753
36f63dca 4754Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4755between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4756@smallexample
4757SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4758@end smallexample
4759whereas this will work:
4760@smallexample
4761SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4762@end smallexample
4763
252b5132
RH
4764@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4765@cindex holes, filling
4766@cindex unspecified memory
4767You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4768current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4769otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4770gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4771with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4772necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4773point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4774than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4775different parts of an output section.
4776
4777This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4778value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4779@smallexample
563e308f 4780FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4781@end smallexample
4782
4783The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4784section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4785part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4786entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4787precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4788expression.
252b5132
RH
4789
4790@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4791@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4792There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4793commands.
4794
4795@table @code
4796@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4797@cindex input filename symbols
4798@cindex filename symbols
4799@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4800The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4801The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4802file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4803the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4804
4805This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4806normally used for any other object file format.
4807
4808@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4809@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4810@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4811@item CONSTRUCTORS
4812When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4813unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4814destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4815arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4816automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4817For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4818linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4819@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4820ignored for other object file formats.
4821
4822The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4823constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4824Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4825the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4826first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4827of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4828compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4829formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4830@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4831the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4832destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4833@code{exit}.
4834
4835For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4836arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4837addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4838and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4839linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4840runtime code expects to see.
4841
4842@smallexample
4843 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4844 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4845 *(.ctors)
4846 LONG(0)
4847 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4848 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4849 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4850 *(.dtors)
4851 LONG(0)
4852 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4853@end smallexample
4854
4855If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4856which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4857are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4858are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4859command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4860@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4861@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4862@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4863
4864Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4865and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4866need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4867scripts.
4868
4869@end table
4870
4871@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4872@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4873@cindex discarding sections
4874@cindex sections, discarding
4875@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4876The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4877This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4878may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4879@smallexample
49c13adb 4880.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4881@end smallexample
4882@noindent
4883will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4884@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4885sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4886space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4887too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4888space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4889@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4890@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4891This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4892
a0976ea4 4893The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4894on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4895symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4896the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4897section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4898
4899@cindex /DISCARD/
4900The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4901input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4902section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4903
4904@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4905@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4906@cindex output section attributes
4907We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4908like this:
0c71d759 4909
252b5132 4910@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4911@group
7e7d5768 4912@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4913 [AT(@var{lma})]
4914 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4915 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4916 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4917 @{
4918 @var{output-section-command}
4919 @var{output-section-command}
4920 @dots{}
562d3460 4921 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4922@end group
4923@end smallexample
0c71d759 4924
252b5132
RH
4925We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4926@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4927remaining section attributes.
4928
a1ab1d2a 4929@menu
252b5132
RH
4930* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4931* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4932* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4933* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4934* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4935* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4936* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4937* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4938@end menu
4939
4940@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4941@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4942Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4943parentheses. The following types are defined:
4944
4945@table @code
4946@item NOLOAD
4947The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4948loaded into memory when the program is run.
4949@item DSECT
4950@itemx COPY
4951@itemx INFO
4952@itemx OVERLAY
4953These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4954rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4955marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4956section when the program is run.
4957@end table
4958
4959@kindex NOLOAD
4960@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4961@cindex loading, preventing
4962The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4963the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4964the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4965@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4966need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4967@smallexample
4968@group
4969SECTIONS @{
4970 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4971 @dots{}
4972@}
4973@end group
4974@end smallexample
4975
4976@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4977@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4978@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4979@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4980@cindex load address
4981@cindex section load address
4982Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4983@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4984@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4985specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4986address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4987
ea5cae92
NC
4988The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4989specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4990takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4991load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4992region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4993
4994If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4995section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4996load address:
4997
4998@itemize @bullet
4999@item
5000If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5001the LMA address as well.
5002
5003@item
5004If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5005
5006@item
5007Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5008with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5009section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5010VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5011the last section in the located region.
5012
5013@item
5014If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5015that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5016
5017@item
5018If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5019section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5020@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5021
5022@cindex ROM initialized data
5023@cindex initialized data in ROM
5024This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5025example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5026called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5027@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5028even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5029uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5030defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5031counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5032
5033@smallexample
5034@group
5035SECTIONS
5036 @{
5037 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5038 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5039 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5040 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5041 .bss 0x3000 :
5042 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5043@}
5044@end group
5045@end smallexample
5046
5047The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5048this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5049the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5050how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5051script.
5052
5053@smallexample
5054@group
5055extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5056char *src = &_etext;
5057char *dst = &_data;
5058
ea5cae92
NC
5059/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5060while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5061 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5062
ea5cae92 5063/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5064for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5065 *dst = 0;
5066@end group
5067@end smallexample
5068
bbf115d3
L
5069@node Forced Output Alignment
5070@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5071@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5072@cindex forcing output section alignment
5073@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5074You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5075alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5076intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5077
7e7d5768
AM
5078@node Forced Input Alignment
5079@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5080@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5081@cindex forcing input section alignment
5082@cindex input section alignment
5083You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5084SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5085sections, whether larger or smaller.
5086
0c71d759
NC
5087@node Output Section Constraint
5088@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5089@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5090@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5091@cindex constraints on output sections
5092You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5093of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5094read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5095@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5096
252b5132 5097@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5098@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5099@kindex >@var{region}
5100@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5101@cindex memory regions and sections
5102You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5103using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5104
5105Here is a simple example:
5106@smallexample
5107@group
5108MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5109SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5110@end group
5111@end smallexample
5112
5113@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5114@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5115@kindex :@var{phdr}
5116@cindex section, assigning to program header
5117@cindex program headers and sections
5118You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5119using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5120one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5121assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5122@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5123linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5124
5125Here is a simple example:
5126@smallexample
5127@group
5128PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5129SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5130@end group
5131@end smallexample
5132
5133@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5134@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5135@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5136@cindex section fill pattern
5137@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5138You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5139@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5140(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5141within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5142alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5143necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5144of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5145an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5146fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5147other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5148pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5149expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5150
5151You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5152output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5153
5154Here is a simple example:
5155@smallexample
5156@group
563e308f 5157SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5158@end group
5159@end smallexample
5160
5161@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5162@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5163@kindex OVERLAY
5164@cindex overlays
5165An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5166are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5167the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5168copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5169required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5170can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5171than another.
5172
5173Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5174@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5175output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5176command is as follows:
5177@smallexample
5178@group
5179OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5180 @{
5181 @var{secname1}
5182 @{
5183 @var{output-section-command}
5184 @var{output-section-command}
5185 @dots{}
5186 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5187 @var{secname2}
5188 @{
5189 @var{output-section-command}
5190 @var{output-section-command}
5191 @dots{}
5192 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5193 @dots{}
abc9061b 5194 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5195@end group
5196@end smallexample
5197
5198Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5199section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5200section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5201those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5202except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5203sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5204
abc9061b
CC
5205The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5206the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5207
252b5132
RH
5208The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5209addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5210memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5211whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5212and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5213and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5214
56dd11f0
NC
5215If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5216references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5217the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5218sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5219@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5220
5221For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5222provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5223defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5224@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5225the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5226within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5227symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5228
5229At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5230the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5231
5232Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5233@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5234@smallexample
5235@group
5236 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5237 @{
5238 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5239 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5240 @}
5241@end group
5242@end smallexample
5243@noindent
5244This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5245address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5246@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5247following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5248@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5249@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5250
5251C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5252like the following.
5253
5254@smallexample
5255@group
5256 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5257 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5258 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5259@end group
5260@end smallexample
5261
5262Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5263everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5264example could have been written identically as follows.
5265
5266@smallexample
5267@group
5268 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5269 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5270 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5271 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5272 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5273 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5274 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5275@end group
5276@end smallexample
5277
5278@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5279@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5280@kindex MEMORY
5281@cindex memory regions
5282@cindex regions of memory
5283@cindex allocating memory
5284@cindex discontinuous memory
5285The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5286memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5287
5288The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5289memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5290may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5291can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5292set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5293regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5294around to fit into the available regions.
5295
127fcdff
AB
5296A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5297however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5298specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5299@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5300@smallexample
5301@group
a1ab1d2a 5302MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5303 @{
5304 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5305 @dots{}
5306 @}
5307@end group
5308@end smallexample
5309
5310The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5311region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5312Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5313with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5314must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5315add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5316command.
252b5132
RH
5317
5318@cindex memory region attributes
5319The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5320whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5321not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5322@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5323section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5324the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5325them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5326
5327The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5328@table @samp
5329@item R
5330Read-only section
5331@item W
5332Read/write section
5333@item X
5334Executable section
5335@item A
5336Allocatable section
5337@item I
5338Initialized section
5339@item L
5340Same as @samp{I}
5341@item !
c09e9a8c 5342Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5343@end table
5344
5345If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5346@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5347attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5348in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5349attributes.
5350
5351@kindex ORIGIN =
5352@kindex o =
5353@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5354The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5355the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5356cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5357abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5358@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5359
5360@kindex LENGTH =
5361@kindex len =
5362@kindex l =
5363The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5364region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5365be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5366@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5367
5368In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5369available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5370and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5371linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5372is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5373or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5374explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5375region.
5376
5377@smallexample
5378@group
a1ab1d2a 5379MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5380 @{
5381 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5382 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5383 @}
5384@end group
5385@end smallexample
5386
5387Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5388specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5389@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5390a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5391output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5392was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5393the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5394output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5395region, the linker will issue an error message.
5396
3ec57632 5397It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5398expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5399@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5400
5401@smallexample
5402@group
c0065db7 5403 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5404@end group
5405@end smallexample
5406
252b5132
RH
5407@node PHDRS
5408@section PHDRS Command
5409@kindex PHDRS
5410@cindex program headers
5411@cindex ELF program headers
5412@cindex program segments
5413@cindex segments, ELF
5414The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5415@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5416loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5417program with the @samp{-p} option.
5418
5419When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5420reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5421program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5422This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5423interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5424
5425The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5426in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5427precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5428the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5429not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5430
5431The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5432generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5433ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5434
5435This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5436@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5437
5438@smallexample
5439@group
5440PHDRS
5441@{
5442 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5443 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5444@}
5445@end group
5446@end smallexample
5447
5448The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5449of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5450header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5451with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5452must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5453is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5454
5455Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5456system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5457specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5458sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5459attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5460Section Phdr}.
5461
5462It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5463merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5464repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5465contain the section.
5466
5467If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5468then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5469not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5470convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5471placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5472default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5473segment at all.
5474
5475@kindex FILEHDR
5476@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5477You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5478the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5479The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5480file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5481include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5482segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5483these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5484
5485The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5486value of the keyword.
5487
5488@table @asis
5489@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5490Indicates an unused program header.
5491
5492@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5493Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5494the file.
5495
5496@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5497Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5498
5499@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5500Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5501found.
5502
5503@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5504Indicates a segment holding note information.
5505
5506@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5507A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5508ABI.
5509
5510@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5511Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5512
1a9ccd70
NC
5513@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5514Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5515
252b5132
RH
5516@item @var{expression}
5517An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5518be used for types not defined above.
5519@end table
5520
5521You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5522in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5523@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5524Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5525output section attribute.
5526
5527The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5528which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5529explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5530an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5531header.
5532
5533Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5534headers used on a native ELF system.
5535
5536@example
5537@group
5538PHDRS
5539@{
5540 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5541 interp PT_INTERP ;
5542 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5543 data PT_LOAD ;
5544 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5545@}
5546
5547SECTIONS
5548@{
5549 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5550 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5551 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5552 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5553 @dots{}
5554 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5555 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5556 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5557 @dots{}
5558@}
5559@end group
5560@end example
5561
5562@node VERSION
5563@section VERSION Command
5564@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5565@cindex symbol versions
5566@cindex version script
5567@cindex versions of symbols
5568The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5569only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5570symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5571a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5572shared library.
5573
5574You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5575you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5576also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5577
5578The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5579@smallexample
5580VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5581@end smallexample
5582
5583The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5584Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5585version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5586version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5587version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5588scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5589library.
5590
5591The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5592examples.
5593
5594@smallexample
5595VERS_1.1 @{
5596 global:
5597 foo1;
5598 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5599 old*;
5600 original*;
5601 new*;
252b5132
RH
5602@};
5603
5604VERS_1.2 @{
5605 foo2;
5606@} VERS_1.1;
5607
5608VERS_2.0 @{
5609 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5610 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5611 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5612 "f(int, double)";
5613 @};
252b5132
RH
5614@} VERS_1.2;
5615@end smallexample
5616
5617This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5618version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5619The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5620a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5621of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5622symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5623is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5624in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5625However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5626name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5627
5628Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5629depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5630to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5631
5632Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5633depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5634and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5635
5636When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5637specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5638unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5639unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5640somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5641wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5642wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5643set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5644ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5645
5646The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5647they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5648could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5649However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5650
0f6bf451 5651Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5652in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5653symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5654won't.
5655
5656@smallexample
7c9c73be 5657@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5658@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5659
252b5132
RH
5660When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5661symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5662requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5663shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5664loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5665linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5666application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5667way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5668all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5669search for each symbol reference.
5670
5671The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5672doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5673that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5674functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5675the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5676required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5677that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5678versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5679the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5680
5681There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5682first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5683source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5684script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5685maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5686@smallexample
5687__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5688@end smallexample
5689@noindent
5690in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5691be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5692The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5693@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5694takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5695
5696The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5697function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5698an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5699version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5700linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5701
5702To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5703source file. Here is an example:
5704
5705@smallexample
5706__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5707__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5708__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5709__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5710@end smallexample
5711
5712In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5713unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5714example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5715@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5716
5717When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5718some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5719this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5720@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5721declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5722you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5723
5724If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5725within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5726(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5727specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5728
cb840a31
L
5729You can also specify the language in the version script:
5730
5731@smallexample
5732VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5733@end smallexample
5734
c0065db7 5735The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5736The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5737demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5738patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5739@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5740
86043bbb
MM
5741Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5742described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5743or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5744the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5745whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5746cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5747might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5748should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5749expect when you upgrade.
5750
252b5132
RH
5751@node Expressions
5752@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5753@cindex expressions
5754@cindex arithmetic
5755The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5756that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5757expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5758host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5759
5760You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5761
5762The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5763expressions.
5764
5765@menu
5766* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5767* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5768* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5769* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5770* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5771* Operators:: Operators
5772* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5773* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5774* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5775@end menu
5776
5777@node Constants
5778@subsection Constants
5779@cindex integer notation
5780@cindex constants in linker scripts
5781All constants are integers.
5782
5783As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5784octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5785hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5786@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5787@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5788value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5789
5790@cindex scaled integers
5791@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5792@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5793@cindex suffixes for integers
5794@cindex integer suffixes
5795In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5796constant by
5797@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5798@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5799@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5800@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5801@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5802@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5803@tex
5804${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5805@end tex
5806@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5807respectively. For example, the following
5808all refer to the same quantity:
5809
252b5132 5810@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5811_fourk_1 = 4K;
5812_fourk_2 = 4096;
5813_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5814_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5815@end smallexample
5816
8a308ae8
NC
5817Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5818conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5819
0c71d759
NC
5820@node Symbolic Constants
5821@subsection Symbolic Constants
5822@cindex symbolic constants
5823@kindex CONSTANT
5824It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5825the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5826
5827@table @code
5828@item MAXPAGESIZE
5829@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5830The target's maximum page size.
5831
5832@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5833@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5834The target's default page size.
5835@end table
5836
5837So for example:
5838
5839@smallexample
9d5777a3 5840 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5841@end smallexample
5842
5843will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5844supported by the target.
5845
252b5132
RH
5846@node Symbols
5847@subsection Symbol Names
5848@cindex symbol names
5849@cindex names
5850@cindex quoted symbol names
5851@kindex "
5852Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5853and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5854Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5855specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5856keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5857@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5858"SECTION" = 9;
5859"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5860@end smallexample
5861
5862Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5863to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5864whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5865
ecca9871
L
5866@node Orphan Sections
5867@subsection Orphan Sections
5868@cindex orphan
5869Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5870are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5871script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5872output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5873in which to place the orphaned input section.
5874
5875If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5876an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5877placed at the end of that output section.
5878
5879If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5880sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5881name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5882orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5883one new output section.
5884
5885If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5886then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5887in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5888linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5889attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5890sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5891support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5892
c005eb9e
AB
5893The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5894(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5895output sections an orphan is placed in.
5896
252b5132
RH
5897@node Location Counter
5898@subsection The Location Counter
5899@kindex .
5900@cindex dot
5901@cindex location counter
5902@cindex current output location
5903The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5904current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5905location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5906within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5907anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5908
5909@cindex holes
5910Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5911moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5912location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5913and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5914doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5915
5916@smallexample
5917SECTIONS
5918@{
5919 output :
5920 @{
5921 file1(.text)
5922 . = . + 1000;
5923 file2(.text)
5924 . += 1000;
5925 file3(.text)
563e308f 5926 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5927@}
5928@end smallexample
5929@noindent
5930In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5931located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5932followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5933@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5934@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5935specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5936
5c6bbab8
NC
5937@cindex dot inside sections
5938Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5939current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5940statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5941absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5942however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5943not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5944
5945@smallexample
5946SECTIONS
5947@{
5948 . = 0x100
5949 .text: @{
5950 *(.text)
5951 . = 0x200
5952 @}
5953 . = 0x500
5954 .data: @{
5955 *(.data)
5956 . += 0x600
5957 @}
5958@}
5959@end smallexample
5960
5961The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5962and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5963the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5964much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5965move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5966and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5967the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5968the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5969
b5666f2f
AM
5970@cindex dot outside sections
5971Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5972output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5973needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5974
5975@smallexample
5976SECTIONS
5977@{
5978 start_of_text = . ;
5979 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5980 end_of_text = . ;
5981
5982 start_of_data = . ;
5983 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5984 end_of_data = . ;
5985@}
5986@end smallexample
5987
5988If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5989not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5990between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5991should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5992blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5993the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5994sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5995statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5996special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5997place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5998as follows:
5999
6000@smallexample
6001SECTIONS
6002@{
6003 start_of_text = . ;
6004 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6005 end_of_text = . ;
6006
6007 start_of_data = . ;
6008 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6009 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6010 end_of_data = . ;
6011@}
6012@end smallexample
6013
6014This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6015@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6016placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6017assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6018a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6019section. So you could write:
6020
6021@smallexample
6022SECTIONS
6023@{
6024 start_of_text = . ;
6025 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6026 end_of_text = . ;
6027
6028 . = . ;
6029 start_of_data = . ;
6030 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6031 end_of_data = . ;
6032@}
6033@end smallexample
6034
6035Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6036@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6037
252b5132
RH
6038@need 2000
6039@node Operators
6040@subsection Operators
6041@cindex operators for arithmetic
6042@cindex arithmetic operators
6043@cindex precedence in expressions
6044The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6045the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6046@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6047@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6048@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6049@smallexample
6050precedence associativity Operators Notes
6051(highest)
60521 left ! - ~ (1)
60532 left * / %
60543 left + -
60554 left >> <<
60565 left == != > < <= >=
60576 left &
60587 left |
60598 left &&
60609 left ||
606110 right ? :
606211 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6063(lowest)
6064@end smallexample
6065Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6066(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6067(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6068@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6069@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6070@tex
6071\vskip \baselineskip
6072%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6073\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6074\hrule
6075\halign
6076{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6077height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6078&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6079height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6080\noalign{\hrule}
6081height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6082&highest&&&&&\cr
6083% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6084&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6085&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6086&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6087&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6088&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6089&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6090&7&&left&&|&\cr
6091&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6092&9&&left&&||&\cr
6093&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6094&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6095&lowest&&&&&\cr
6096height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6097\hrule}
6098@end tex
6099@iftex
6100{
6101@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6102@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6103@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6104}
6105@end iftex
6106@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6107
6108@node Evaluation
6109@subsection Evaluation
6110@cindex lazy evaluation
6111@cindex expression evaluation order
6112The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6113an expression when absolutely necessary.
6114
6115The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6116address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6117regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6118as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6119
6120However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6121until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6122other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6123for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6124
6125The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6126assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6127allocation.
6128
6129Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6130@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6131
6132If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6133available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6134following
6135@smallexample
6136@group
6137SECTIONS
6138 @{
a1ab1d2a 6139 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6140 @{ *(.text) @}
6141 @}
6142@end group
6143@end smallexample
6144@noindent
6145will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6146address}.
6147
6148@node Expression Section
6149@subsection The Section of an Expression
6150@cindex expression sections
6151@cindex absolute expressions
6152@cindex relative expressions
6153@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6154@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6155@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6156Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6157relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6158using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6159value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6160symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6161operations.
6162
abf4be64
AM
6163Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6164section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6165address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6166@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6167functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6168One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6169(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6170differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6171versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6172section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6173Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6174absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6175given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6176everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6177
6178In the following simple example,
252b5132 6179
7542af2a
AM
6180@smallexample
6181@group
6182SECTIONS
6183 @{
6184 . = 0x100;
6185 __executable_start = 0x100;
6186 .data :
6187 @{
6188 . = 0x10;
6189 __data_start = 0x10;
6190 *(.data)
6191 @}
6192 @dots{}
6193 @}
6194@end group
6195@end smallexample
252b5132 6196
7542af2a
AM
6197both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6198address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6199@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6200section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6201
5c3049d2
AM
6202For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6203addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6204
6205@itemize @bullet
6206@item
c05f749e
AM
6207Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6208operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6209absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6210@item
7542af2a
AM
6211Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6212relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6213and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6214@item
c05f749e
AM
6215Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6216in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6217address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6218before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6219@end itemize
6220
6221The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6222
6223@itemize @bullet
6224@item
6225An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6226@item
6227The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6228@item
9bc8bb33 6229The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6230relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6231(after above conversions) is also a number when
6232@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6233but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6234@item
6235The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6236relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6237section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6238@item
6239The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6240conversions) is an absolute address.
6241@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6242
6243You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6244to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6245create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6246section @samp{.data}:
6247@smallexample
6248SECTIONS
6249 @{
6250 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6251 @}
6252@end smallexample
6253@noindent
6254If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6255@samp{.data} section.
6256
7542af2a
AM
6257Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6258particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6259
252b5132
RH
6260@node Builtin Functions
6261@subsection Builtin Functions
6262@cindex functions in expressions
6263The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6264use in linker script expressions.
6265
6266@table @code
6267@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6268@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6269@cindex expression, absolute
6270Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6271of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6272value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6273normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6274
6275@item ADDR(@var{section})
6276@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6277@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6278Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6279script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6280the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6281@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6282@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6283the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6284@smallexample
6285@group
6286SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6287 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6288 @{
252b5132
RH
6289 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6290 @dots{}
6291 @}
6292 .output :
6293 @{
6294 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6295 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6296 @}
6297@dots{} @}
6298@end group
6299@end smallexample
6300
876f4090
NS
6301@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6302@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6303@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6304@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6305@cindex round up location counter
6306@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6307@cindex round up expression
6308@cindex align expression
6309Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6310to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6311doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6312arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6313expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6314equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6315
6316Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6317next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6318variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6319input sections:
252b5132
RH
6320@smallexample
6321@group
6322SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6323 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6324 *(.data)
6325 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6326 @}
6327@dots{} @}
6328@end group
6329@end smallexample
6330@noindent
6331The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6332a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6333a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6334of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6335
6336The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6337
362c1d1a
NS
6338@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6339@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6340@cindex section alignment
6341Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6342been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6343evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6344the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6345value in that section.
6346@smallexample
6347@group
6348SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6349 .output @{
6350 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6351 @dots{}
6352 @}
6353@dots{} @}
6354@end group
6355@end smallexample
6356
252b5132
RH
6357@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6358@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6359This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6360scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6361section.
6362
2d20f7bf
JJ
6363@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6364@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6365This is equivalent to either
6366@smallexample
6367(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6368@end smallexample
6369or
6370@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6371(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6372 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6373@end smallexample
6374@noindent
6375depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6376for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6377@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6378If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6379memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6380bytes in the on-disk file.
6381
6382This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6383any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6384@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6385be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6386running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6387that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6388page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6389
6390@noindent
6391Example:
6392@smallexample
6393 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6394@end smallexample
6395
6396@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6397@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6398This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6399evaluation purposes.
6400
6401@smallexample
6402 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6403@end smallexample
6404
a4f5ad88
JJ
6405@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6406@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6407This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6408@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6409When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6410does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6411@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6412argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6413script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6414@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6415padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6416section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6417
6418@smallexample
6419 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6420@end smallexample
6421
252b5132
RH
6422@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6423@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6424@cindex symbol defaults
6425Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6426defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6427return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6428default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6429shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6430the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6431existed, its value is preserved:
6432
6433@smallexample
6434@group
6435SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6436 .text : @{
6437 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6438 @dots{}
6439 @}
6440 @dots{}
6441@}
6442@end group
6443@end smallexample
6444
3ec57632
NC
6445@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6446@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6447Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6448
252b5132
RH
6449@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6450@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6451@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6452Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6453Section LMA}).
6454
2e53f7d6
NC
6455@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6456@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6457Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6458@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6459
252b5132
RH
6460@kindex MAX
6461@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6462Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6463
6464@kindex MIN
6465@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6466Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6467
6468@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6469@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6470@cindex unallocated address, next
6471Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6472This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6473use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6474output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6475
3ec57632
NC
6476@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6477@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6478Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6479
ba916c8a
MM
6480@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6481@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6482Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6483value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6484@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6485will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6486can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6487``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6488name.
6489
252b5132
RH
6490@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6491@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6492@cindex section size
6493Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6494been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6495evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6496@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6497@smallexample
6498@group
6499SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6500 .output @{
6501 .start = . ;
6502 @dots{}
6503 .end = . ;
6504 @}
6505 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6506 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6507@dots{} @}
6508@end group
6509@end smallexample
6510
6511@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6512@itemx sizeof_headers
6513@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6514@cindex header size
6515Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6516information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6517this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6518choose, to facilitate paging.
6519
6520@cindex not enough room for program headers
6521@cindex program headers, not enough room
6522When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6523@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6524number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6525addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6526additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6527room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6528the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6529script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6530you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6531command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6532@end table
6533
6534@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6535@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6536@cindex implicit linker scripts
6537If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6538an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6539linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6540linker will report an error.
6541
6542An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6543
6544Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6545assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6546commands.
6547
6548Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6549at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6550read. This can affect archive searching.
6551
6552@ifset GENERIC
6553@node Machine Dependent
6554@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6555
6556@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6557@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6558sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6559functionality are not listed.
6560
6561@menu
36f63dca
NC
6562@ifset H8300
6563* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6564@end ifset
6565@ifset I960
6566* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6567@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6568@ifset M68HC11
6569* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6570@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6571@ifset ARM
6572* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6573@end ifset
6574@ifset HPPA
6575* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6576@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6577@ifset M68K
6578* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6579@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6580@ifset MIPS
6581* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6582@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6583@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6584* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6585@end ifset
2469cfa2 6586@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6587* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6588@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6589@ifset NDS32
6590* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6591@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6592@ifset NIOSII
6593* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6594@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6595@ifset POWERPC
6596* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6597@end ifset
6598@ifset POWERPC64
6599* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6600@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6601@ifset S/390
6602* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6603@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6604@ifset SPU
6605* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6606@end ifset
74459f0e 6607@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6608* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6609@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6610@ifset WIN32
6611* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6612@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6613@ifset XTENSA
6614* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6615@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6616@end menu
6617@end ifset
6618
252b5132
RH
6619@ifset H8300
6620@ifclear GENERIC
6621@raisesections
6622@end ifclear
6623
6624@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6625@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6626
6627@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6628For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6629you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6630
6631@table @emph
6632@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6633@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6634@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6635targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6636program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6637respectively.
6638
6639@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6640@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6641@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6642@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6643sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6644page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6645(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6646@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6647top page of memory).
1502569c 6648
81f5558e
NC
6649@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6650indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6651displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6652the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6653@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6654whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6655range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6656
1502569c 6657@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6658@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6659biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6660which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6661page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6662(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6663@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6664the top page of memory).
6665
6666@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6667@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
666832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6669changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6670(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6671@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6672the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6673@end table
6674
6675@ifclear GENERIC
6676@lowersections
6677@end ifclear
6678@end ifset
6679
36f63dca 6680@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6681@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6682@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6683@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6684@node Renesas
6685@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6686
c2dcd04e
NC
6687@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6688H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6689options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6690@end ifset
6691@end ifclear
6692
6693@ifset I960
6694@ifclear GENERIC
6695@raisesections
6696@end ifclear
6697
6698@node i960
6699@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6700
6701@cindex i960 support
6702
6703You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6704specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6705family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6706incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6707linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6708libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6709search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6710
6711For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6712well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6713paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6714the names
6715
6716@smallexample
6717@group
6718try
6719libtry.a
6720tryca
6721libtryca.a
6722@end group
6723@end smallexample
6724
6725@noindent
6726The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6727two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6728
6729You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6730the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6731use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6732specifies a library.
6733
6734@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6735@cindex relaxing on i960
6736@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6737you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6738@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6739them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6740instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6741instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6742target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6743not itself call any subroutines).
6744
6745@ifclear GENERIC
6746@lowersections
6747@end ifclear
6748@end ifset
6749
6750@ifset ARM
6751@ifclear GENERIC
6752@raisesections
6753@end ifclear
6754
93fd0973
SC
6755@ifset M68HC11
6756@ifclear GENERIC
6757@raisesections
6758@end ifclear
6759
6760@node M68HC11/68HC12
6761@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6762
6763@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6764
6765@subsection Linker Relaxation
6766
6767For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6768optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6769
6770@table @emph
6771@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6772@item relaxing address modes
6773@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6774targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6775program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6776respectively.
6777
6778@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6779transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6780page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6781
6782@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6783When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6784of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6785addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6786@code{bset} instructions.
6787
6788@end table
6789
6790@subsection Trampoline Generation
6791
6792@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6793@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6794For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6795call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6796will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6797trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6798case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6799point to the function trampoline.
6800
6801@ifclear GENERIC
6802@lowersections
6803@end ifclear
6804@end ifset
6805
36f63dca 6806@node ARM
3674e28a 6807@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6808
6809@cindex ARM interworking support
6810@kindex --support-old-code
6811For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6812between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6813been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6814line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6815libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6816option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6817given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6818which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6819the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6820non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6821
6822@cindex thumb entry point
6823@cindex entry point, thumb
6824@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6825The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6826@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6827But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6828branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6829executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6830
ce11ba6c
KT
6831@cindex PE import table prefixing
6832@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6833The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6834the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6835element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6836import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6837
e489d0ae
PB
6838@cindex BE8
6839@kindex --be8
6840The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6841executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6842objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6843option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6844little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6845
3674e28a
PB
6846@cindex TARGET1
6847@kindex --target1-rel
6848@kindex --target1-abs
6849The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6850@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6851or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6852and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6853
6854@cindex TARGET2
6855@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6856The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6857@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6858meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6859@table @samp
6860@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6861@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6862@item abs
6863@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6864@item got-rel
6865@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6866@end table
6867
319850b4
JB
6868@cindex FIX_V4BX
6869@kindex --fix-v4bx
6870The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6871specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6872interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6873also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6874
6875In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6876linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6877@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6878
6879In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6880relocations are ignored.
6881
845b51d6
PB
6882@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6883@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6884Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6885relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6886
6887@smallexample
6888TST rM, #1
6889MOVEQ PC, rM
6890BX Rn
6891@end smallexample
6892
6893This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6894and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6895condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6896
33bfe774
JB
6897@cindex USE_BLX
6898@kindex --use-blx
6899The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6900BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6901situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6902code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6903each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6904
6905This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6906specify it if you are using that target.
6907
c6dd86c6
JB
6908@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6909@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6910The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6911bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6912instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6913to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6914the support code can read the intended values.
6915
6916The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6917intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6918and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6919intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6920full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6921you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6922
6923If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6924enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6925@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6926mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6927vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6928@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6929
6930If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6931potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6932such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6933first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6934instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6935the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6936are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6937
2de70689
MGD
6938@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6939@kindex --fix-arm1176
6940@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6941The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6942in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6943are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6944unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6945
9d5777a3 6946Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6947Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6948http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6949
a504d23a
LA
6950@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6951@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6952
6953The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6954workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6955the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6956off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6957the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6958core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6959integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6960VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6961
6962The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6963necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6964
6965The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6966@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6967STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6968linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6969@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6970
6971If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6972potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6973such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6974replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6975branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6976then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6977
6978The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6979the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6980
6981The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6982they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6983there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6984occurs.
6985
6986The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6987PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6988large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6989cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6990occurs.
6991
bf21ed78
MS
6992@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6993@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6994The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6995warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6996enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6997linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6998using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6999not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7000
7001@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7002@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7003The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7004warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7005@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7006linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7007using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7008
726150b7
NC
7009@cindex PIC_VENEER
7010@kindex --pic-veneer
7011The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7012ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7013is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7014@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7015
7016@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7017@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7018The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7019code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7020perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7021placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7022controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7023The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7024duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7025group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7026code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7027where they should be placed.
7028
7029The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7030@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7031placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7032branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7033placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7034value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7035exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7036A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7037linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7038from the input sections.
7039
7040The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7041@samp{N = +1}.
7042
1a51c1a4
NC
7043Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7044only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7045otherwise.
7046
1db37fe6
YG
7047@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7048@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7049@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7050The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7051
7052The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7053
68fcca92
JW
7054@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7055@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7056@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7057The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7058
7059Please contact ARM for further details.
7060
1db37fe6
YG
7061@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7062@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7063@cindex Merging exidx entries
7064The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7065
7066@kindex --long-plt
7067@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7068The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7069which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7070entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7071
1f56df9d
JW
7072@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7073@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7074The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7075link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7076
4ba2ef8f
TP
7077@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7078All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7079Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7080@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7081veneers in memory.
7082
54ddd295
TP
7083@kindex --cmse-implib
7084@cindex Secure gateway import library
7085The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7086specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7087secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7088executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7089
0955507f
TP
7090@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7091@cindex Input import library
7092The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7093must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7094given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7095in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7096@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7097library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7098library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7099for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7100specified.
7101
36f63dca
NC
7102@ifclear GENERIC
7103@lowersections
7104@end ifclear
7105@end ifset
7106
7107@ifset HPPA
7108@ifclear GENERIC
7109@raisesections
7110@end ifclear
7111
7112@node HPPA ELF32
7113@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7114@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7115@kindex --multi-subspace
7116When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7117import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7118The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7119stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7120multiple sub-spaces.
7121
7122@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7123@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7124Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7125stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7126@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7127sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7128a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7129the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7130conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7131prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7132A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7133branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7134@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7135@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7136detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7137positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7138
7139Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7140single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7141create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7142large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7143
7144@ifclear GENERIC
7145@lowersections
7146@end ifclear
7147@end ifset
7148
7fb9f789
NC
7149@ifset M68K
7150@ifclear GENERIC
7151@raisesections
7152@end ifclear
7153
7154@node M68K
7155@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7156
7157@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7158@kindex --got=@var{type}
7159The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7160The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7161@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7162the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7163@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7164entries only at non-negative offsets.
7165@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7166entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7167support such GOTs.
7168@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7169output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7170file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7171files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7172
7173@ifclear GENERIC
7174@lowersections
7175@end ifclear
7176@end ifset
7177
833794fc
MR
7178@ifset MIPS
7179@ifclear GENERIC
7180@raisesections
7181@end ifclear
7182
7183@node MIPS
7184@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7185
7186@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7187@kindex --insn32
7188@kindex --no-insn32
7189The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7190microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7191in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7192used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7193or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7194including 16-bit ones where possible.
7195
8b10b0b3
MR
7196@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7197@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7198@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7199The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7200control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7201@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7202relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7203calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7204relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7205instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7206or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7207the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7208
833794fc
MR
7209@ifclear GENERIC
7210@lowersections
7211@end ifclear
7212@end ifset
7213
36f63dca
NC
7214@ifset MMIX
7215@ifclear GENERIC
7216@raisesections
7217@end ifclear
7218
7219@node MMIX
7220@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7221For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7222@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7223understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7224can translate between the two formats.
7225
7226There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7227Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7228registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7229equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7230@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7231global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7232this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7233symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7234
7a2de473
HPN
7235Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7236@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7237The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7238of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7239
7240Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7241are left out from an mmo file.
7242
7243@ifclear GENERIC
7244@lowersections
7245@end ifclear
7246@end ifset
7247
7248@ifset MSP430
7249@ifclear GENERIC
7250@raisesections
7251@end ifclear
7252
7253@node MSP430
7254@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7255For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7256will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7257just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7258
7259@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7260The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7261
7262@table @code
7263@item @samp{.vectors}
7264Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7265
7266@item @samp{.bootloader}
7267Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7268in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7269
7270@item @samp{.infomem}
7271Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7272this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7273
c0065db7 7274@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7275This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7276in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7277
7278@item @samp{.noinit}
7279Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7280
c0065db7 7281The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7282@end table
7283
7ef3addb
JL
7284@table @option
7285@cindex MSP430 Options
7286@kindex --code-region
7287@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7288This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7289argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7290using this option.
7291
7292@kindex --data-region
7293@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7294This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7295[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7296for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7297
7298@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7299@item --disable-sec-transformation
7300Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7301and @code{--data-region} options.
7302This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7303wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7304not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7305@end table
7306
36f63dca
NC
7307@ifclear GENERIC
7308@lowersections
7309@end ifclear
7310@end ifset
7311
35c08157
KLC
7312@ifset NDS32
7313@ifclear GENERIC
7314@raisesections
7315@end ifclear
7316
7317@node NDS32
7318@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7319@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7320For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7321relaxes objects according to these options.
7322
7323@table @code
7324@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7325Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7326
7327@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7328Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7329
7330@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7331Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7332
7333@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7334Export the EX9 table after linking.
7335
7336@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7337Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7338
7339@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7340Update the existing EX9 table.
7341
7342@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7343Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7344
7345@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7346Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7347
7348@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7349Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7350
7351@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7352Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7353@end table
7354
7355@ifclear GENERIC
7356@lowersections
7357@end ifclear
7358@end ifset
7359
78058a5e
SL
7360@ifset NIOSII
7361@ifclear GENERIC
7362@raisesections
7363@end ifclear
7364
7365@node Nios II
7366@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7367@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7368@kindex --relax on Nios II
7369
7370Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7371transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7372which may result in @command{ld} giving
7373@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7374The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7375trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7376outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7377trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7378be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7379larger than 256MB.
7380
7381The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7382is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7383@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7384locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7385source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7386register as a temporary.
7387
7388Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7389relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7390option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7391
7392@ifclear GENERIC
7393@lowersections
7394@end ifclear
7395@end ifset
7396
2a60a7a8
AM
7397@ifset POWERPC
7398@ifclear GENERIC
7399@raisesections
7400@end ifclear
7401
7402@node PowerPC ELF32
7403@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7404@cindex PowerPC long branches
7405@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7406Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7407displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7408@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7409@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7410the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7411section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7412section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7413@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7414both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7415considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7416
7417@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7418@table @option
7419@cindex PowerPC PLT
7420@kindex --bss-plt
7421@item --bss-plt
7422Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7423generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7424the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7425writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7426@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7427PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7428compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7429BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7430
016687f8
AM
7431@kindex --secure-plt
7432@item --secure-plt
7433@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7434@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7435when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7436layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7437style BSS PLT.
7438
2a60a7a8
AM
7439@cindex PowerPC GOT
7440@kindex --sdata-got
7441@item --sdata-got
7442The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7443sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7444@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7445section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7446@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7447@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7448@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7449@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7450PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7451pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7452GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7453really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7454
7455@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7456@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7457@item --emit-stub-syms
7458This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7459symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7460
7461@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7462@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7463@item --no-tls-optimize
7464PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7465sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7466disable the optimization.
7467@end table
7468
7469@ifclear GENERIC
7470@lowersections
7471@end ifclear
7472@end ifset
7473
7474@ifset POWERPC64
7475@ifclear GENERIC
7476@raisesections
7477@end ifclear
7478
7479@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7480@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7481
7482@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7483@table @option
7484@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7485@kindex --stub-group-size
7486@item --stub-group-size
7487Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7488by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7489@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7490sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7491a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7492the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7493conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7494prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7495A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7496branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7497@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7498@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7499detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7500positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7501
7502Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7503single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7504create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7505large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7506
7507@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7508@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7509@item --emit-stub-syms
7510This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7511symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7512
7513@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7514@kindex --dotsyms
7515@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7516@item --dotsyms
7517@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7518These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7519in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7520function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7521code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7522properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7523to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7524@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7525dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7526feature.
7527
7ae4ea7d
AM
7528@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7529@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7530@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7531@item --save-restore-funcs
7532@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7533These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7534provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7535@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7536function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7537link.
7538
2a60a7a8
AM
7539@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7540@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7541@item --no-tls-optimize
7542PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7543sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7544disable the optimization.
7545
7c9cf415
AM
7546@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7547@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7548@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7549@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7550@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7551These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7552stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7553an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7554@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7555stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7556option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7557Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7558slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7559application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7560normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7561
2a60a7a8
AM
7562@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7563@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7564@item --no-opd-optimize
7565PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7566corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7567the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7568Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7569
7570@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7571@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7572@item --non-overlapping-opd
7573Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7574@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7575the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7576entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7577
7578@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7579@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7580@item --no-toc-optimize
7581PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7582entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7583reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7584marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7585marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7586relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7587unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7588reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7589discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7590reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7591code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7592optimization.
7593
7594@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7595@kindex --no-multi-toc
7596@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7597If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7598@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7599where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7600entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7601total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7602grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7603TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7604calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7605help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
760664K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7607Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7608
7609@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7610@kindex --no-toc-sort
7611@item --no-toc-sort
7612By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7613happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7614placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7615with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7616referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7617@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7618results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7619off this feature.
7620
7621@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7622@kindex --plt-align
7623@kindex --no-plt-align
7624@item --plt-align
7625@itemx --no-plt-align
7626Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7627aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7628boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7629specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7630specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7631if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7632PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7633
7634@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7635@kindex --plt-static-chain
7636@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7637@item --plt-static-chain
7638@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7639Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7640chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7641chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7642
7643@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7644@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7645@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7646@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7647@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7648With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7649lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7650another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7651order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7652memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7653barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7654looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7655seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7656default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7657
7658@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7659@kindex --plt-localentry
7660@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7661@item --plt-localentry
7662@itemx --no-localentry
7663ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7664ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7665(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7666Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7667or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7668functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7669in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7670interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7671including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7672to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7673complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7674care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7675@end table
7676
7677@ifclear GENERIC
7678@lowersections
7679@end ifclear
7680@end ifset
7681
b4cbbe8f
AK
7682@ifset S/390
7683@ifclear GENERIC
7684@raisesections
7685@end ifclear
7686
7687@node S/390 ELF
7688@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7689
7690@cindex S/390 ELF options
7691@table @option
7692
7693@cindex S/390
7694@kindex --s390-pgste
7695@item --s390-pgste
7696This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7697segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7698binaries marked that way.
7699@end table
7700
7701@ifclear GENERIC
7702@lowersections
7703@end ifclear
7704@end ifset
7705
49fa1e15
AM
7706@ifset SPU
7707@ifclear GENERIC
7708@raisesections
7709@end ifclear
7710
7711@node SPU ELF
7712@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7713
7714@cindex SPU ELF options
7715@table @option
7716
7717@cindex SPU plugins
7718@kindex --plugin
7719@item --plugin
7720This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7721
7722@cindex SPU overlays
7723@kindex --no-overlays
7724@item --no-overlays
7725Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7726regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7727@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7728turns off all this special overlay handling.
7729
7730@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7731@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7732@item --emit-stub-syms
7733This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7734symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7735
7736@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7737@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7738@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7739This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7740function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7741on calls to non-overlay regions.
7742
7743@cindex SPU local store size
7744@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7745@item --local-store=lo:hi
7746@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7747the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7748range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7749
c0065db7 7750@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7751@kindex --stack-analysis
7752@item --stack-analysis
7753SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7754unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7755under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7756@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7757@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7758determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7759for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7760for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7761for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7762find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7763and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7764under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7765dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7766is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7767and calls will be given.
7768
c0065db7 7769@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7770@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7771@item --emit-stack-syms
7772This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7773in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7774These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7775functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7776functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7777such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7778The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7779@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7780@end table
7781
7782@ifclear GENERIC
7783@lowersections
7784@end ifclear
7785@end ifset
7786
36f63dca
NC
7787@ifset TICOFF
7788@ifclear GENERIC
7789@raisesections
7790@end ifclear
7791
7792@node TI COFF
7793@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7794@cindex TI COFF versions
7795@kindex --format=@var{version}
7796The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7797TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7798also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7799format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7800header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7801
7802@ifclear GENERIC
7803@lowersections
7804@end ifclear
7805@end ifset
7806
2ca22b03
NC
7807@ifset WIN32
7808@ifclear GENERIC
7809@raisesections
7810@end ifclear
7811
7812@node WIN32
7813@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7814
c0065db7 7815This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7816See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7817command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7818
7819@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7820@cindex import libraries
7821@item import libraries
69da35b5 7822The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7823libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7824regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7825archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7826support for creating such libraries provided with the
7827@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7828
c0065db7
RM
7829@item exporting DLL symbols
7830@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7831The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7832
7833@table @emph
7834@item using auto-export functionality
7835@cindex using auto-export functionality
7836By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7837which is controlled by the following command line options:
7838
0a5d968e
NC
7839@itemize
7840@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7841@item --exclude-symbols
7842@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7843@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7844@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7845@end itemize
7846
09e2aba4
DK
7847When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7848(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7849symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7850often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7851private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7852options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7853exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7854final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7855
7856If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7857command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7858if either of the following are true:
7859
7860@itemize
7861@item A DEF file is used.
7862@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7863@end itemize
dc8465bf 7864
c0065db7
RM
7865@item using a DEF file
7866@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7867Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7868an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7869exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7870name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7871command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7872
7873@example
7874gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7875@end example
7876
0a5d968e
NC
7877Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7878@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7879
dc8465bf
NC
7880Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7881
7882@example
4b5bd4e7 7883LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7884
7885EXPORTS
7886foo
7887bar
7888_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7889another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7890var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7891doo = foo == foo2
7892eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7893@end example
dc8465bf 7894
7fcab871 7895This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7896symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7897alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7898by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7899@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7900@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7901export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7902in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7903symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7904
6b31ad16
DS
7905The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7906name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7907the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7908
b45619c0
NC
7909When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7910library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7911@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7912executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7913
7914With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7915specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7916non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7917
7918If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7919or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7920filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7921
4b5bd4e7
DS
7922The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7923
7924@example
7925EXPORTS
7926 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7927 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7928 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7929@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7930
7931Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7932@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7933@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7934@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7935Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7936@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7937string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7938
7939The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7940
7941@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7942will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7943by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7944linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7945library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7946
7947@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7948The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7949the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7950@code{*_imp__foo}).
7951
7952@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7953well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7954read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7955variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7956the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7957extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7958application will behave unexpectedly.
7959
7960@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7961it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7962symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7963API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7964the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7965
4b5bd4e7
DS
7966See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7967other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7968
7969@cindex creating a DEF file
7970While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7971with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7972
7973@item Using decorations
7974@cindex Using decorations
7975Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7976itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7977declared as:
7978
7979@example
7980__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7981__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7982@end example
7983
7984All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7985any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7986this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7987the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7988
7989Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7990decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7991instead:
7992
7993@example
7994__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7995__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7996@end example
7997
c0065db7
RM
7998This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7999when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8000variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8001code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8002of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8003omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8004@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8005information.
c0065db7 8006@end table
dc8465bf 8007
2ca22b03
NC
8008@cindex automatic data imports
8009@item automatic data imports
8010The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8011by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8012compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8013issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8014code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8015c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8016initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8017decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8018platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8019command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8020The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8021suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8022trigger the feature's use.
8023
c0065db7 8024auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8025additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8026
c0065db7 8027"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8028documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8029
c0065db7
RM
8030The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8031occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8032One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8033below.
8034
8035@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8036For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8037object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8038offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8039field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8040in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8041without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8042The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8043references.
8044
c0065db7
RM
8045The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8046be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8047themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8048runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8049compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8050support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8051run without error on an older system.
8052
c0065db7
RM
8053@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8054enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8055
8056@cindex direct linking to a dll
8057@item direct linking to a dll
8058The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8059including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8060libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8061traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8062libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8063function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8064though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8065storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8066tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8067large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8068
c0065db7 8069Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8070@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8071of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8072perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8073select the dll instead of an import library.
8074
2ca22b03 8075
69da35b5
NC
8076For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8077to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8078
8079@example
45e948fe
NC
8080libxxx.dll.a
8081xxx.dll.a
8082libxxx.a
8083xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8084libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8085cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8086libxxx.dll
8087xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8088@end example
8089
69da35b5
NC
8090before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8091
c0065db7
RM
8092(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8093where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8094@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8095file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8096@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8097
c0065db7
RM
8098Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8099@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8100was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8101various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8102could coexist on the same machine.
8103
2ca22b03
NC
8104The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8105applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8106libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8107
8108@example
8109bin/
8110 cygxxx.dll
8111lib/
8112 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8113 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8114@end example
8115
c0065db7
RM
8116Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8117done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8118
81191. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8120@example
8121gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8122@end example
2ca22b03 8123
69da35b5
NC
8124However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8125(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8126@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8127not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8128
2ca22b03
NC
81292. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8130directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8131should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8132making the app/dll.
8133
8134@example
8135ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8136@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8137
8138Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8139
8140@example
8141gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8142@end example
69da35b5
NC
8143
8144This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8145perfectly legal
8146
8147@example
8148bin/
8149 cygxxx-5.dll
8150lib/
c0065db7 8151 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8152@end example
8153
dc8465bf 8154Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8155even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8156@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8157
8158Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8159wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8160
81611. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8162work with auto-imported data.
8163
dc8465bf
NC
81642. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8165import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8166symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8167for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8168possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8169
45e948fe
NC
81703. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8171critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8172in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8173stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8174
69da35b5 8175So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8176true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8177a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8178binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8179massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8180requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8181will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8182
c0065db7 8183@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8184@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8185@item adding additional names
8186Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8187A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8188exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8189when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8190import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8191
c0065db7 8192@example
dc8465bf
NC
8193LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8194
8195EXPORTS
c0065db7 8196foo
dc8465bf 8197_foo = foo
c0065db7 8198@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8199
8200The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8201
8202Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8203source code using the "weak" attribute:
8204
c0065db7
RM
8205@example
8206void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8207void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8208@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8209
8210See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8211symbols.
8212
8213@item renaming symbols
8214Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8215kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8216@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8217DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8218created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8219
c0065db7 8220@example
dc8465bf
NC
8221LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8222
8223EXPORTS
8224_foo = foo
c0065db7 8225@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8226
8227The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8228@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8229@end table
dc8465bf 8230
0a5d968e 8231Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8232unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8233If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8234@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8235that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8236@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8237renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8238to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8239the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8240In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8241which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8242
8243@cindex weak externals
8244@item weak externals
8245The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8246weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8247defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8248are three variants of weak externals:
8249@itemize
8250@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8251called lazy externals.
8252@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8253This form is not presently implemented.
8254@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8255implemented.
8256@end itemize
8257As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8258are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8259uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8260
8261@cindex aligned common symbols
8262@item aligned common symbols
8263As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8264desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8265the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8266carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8267by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8268tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8269but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8270warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8271
2ca22b03
NC
8272@end table
8273
8274@ifclear GENERIC
8275@lowersections
8276@end ifclear
8277@end ifset
8278
e0001a05
NC
8279@ifset XTENSA
8280@ifclear GENERIC
8281@raisesections
8282@end ifclear
8283
8284@node Xtensa
8285@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8286
8287@cindex Xtensa processors
8288The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8289@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8290specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8291keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8292example, with the command:
8293
8294@smallexample
8295SECTIONS
8296@{
8297 .text : @{
8298 *(.literal .text)
8299 @}
8300@}
8301@end smallexample
8302
8303@noindent
8304@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8305and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8306literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8307interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8308group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8309files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8310and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8311
43cd72b9 8312@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8313@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8314Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8315provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8316is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8317literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8318will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8319location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8320the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8321unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8322@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8323range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8324
8325For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8326to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8327instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8328instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8329instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8330@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8331hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8332By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8333switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8334density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8335instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8336performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8337linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8338a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8339
8340The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8341control the linker:
8342
8343@cindex Xtensa options
8344@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8345@item --size-opt
8346When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8347more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8348no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8349alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8350preserve the correctness of the code.
8351@end table
e0001a05
NC
8352
8353@ifclear GENERIC
8354@lowersections
8355@end ifclear
8356@end ifset
8357
252b5132
RH
8358@ifclear SingleFormat
8359@node BFD
8360@chapter BFD
8361
8362@cindex back end
8363@cindex object file management
8364@cindex object formats available
8365@kindex objdump -i
8366The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8367These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8368object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8369format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8370it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8371associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8372object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8373(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8374list all the formats available for your configuration.
8375
8376@cindex BFD requirements
8377@cindex requirements for BFD
8378As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8379several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8380BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8381formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8382been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8383BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8384may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8385
8386One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8387mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8388useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8389conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8390
8391@menu
8392* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8393@end menu
8394
8395@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8396@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8397@cindex opening object files
8398@include bfdsumm.texi
8399@end ifclear
8400
8401@node Reporting Bugs
8402@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8403@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8404@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8405
ff5dcc92 8406Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8407
8408Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8409it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8410to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8411work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8412@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8413
8414In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8415information that enables us to fix the bug.
8416
8417@menu
8418* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8419* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8420@end menu
8421
8422@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8423@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8424@cindex bug criteria
8425
8426If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8427
8428@itemize @bullet
8429@cindex fatal signal
8430@cindex linker crash
8431@cindex crash of linker
8432@item
8433If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8434@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8435
8436@cindex error on valid input
8437@item
ff5dcc92 8438If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8439
8440@cindex invalid input
8441@item
ff5dcc92 8442If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8443may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8444object files are correct.
8445
8446@item
8447If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8448improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8449@end itemize
8450
8451@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8452@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8453@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8454@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8455
8456A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8457products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8458recommend you contact that organization first.
8459
8460You can find contact information for many support companies and
8461individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8462distribution.
8463
ad22bfe8 8464@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8465Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8466@value{BUGURL}.
8467@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8468
8469The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8470@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8471fact or leave it out, state it!
8472
8473Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8474problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8475assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8476matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8477the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8478location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8479were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8480into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8481specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8482and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8483
8484Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8485the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8486on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8487
8488Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8489bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8490respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8491You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8492
8493To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8494
8495@itemize @bullet
8496@item
ff5dcc92 8497The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8498the @samp{--version} argument.
8499
8500Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8501the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8502
8503@item
ff5dcc92 8504Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8505patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8506
8507@item
8508The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8509version number.
8510
8511@item
ff5dcc92 8512What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8513``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8514
8515@item
8516The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8517observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8518list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8519sufficient.
8520
8521If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8522and then we might not encounter the bug.
8523
8524@item
8525A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8526bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8527provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8528bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8529state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8530requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8531we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8532attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8533
8534If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8535@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8536object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8537@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8538how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8539
8540@item
8541A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8542incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8543
ff5dcc92 8544Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8545will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8546not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8547a chance to make a mistake.
8548
8549Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8550say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8551copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8552C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8553and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8554fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8555you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8556any conclusion from our observations.
8557
8558@item
ff5dcc92 8559If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8560diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8561@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8562If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8563context, not by line number.
8564
8565The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8566sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8567@end itemize
8568
8569Here are some things that are not necessary:
8570
8571@itemize @bullet
8572@item
8573A description of the envelope of the bug.
8574
8575Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8576which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8577changes will not affect it.
8578
8579This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8580will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8581with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8582We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8583
8584Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8585of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8586output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8587less time, and so on.
8588
8589However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8590report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8591
8592@item
8593A patch for the bug.
8594
8595A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8596the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8597a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8598to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8599
ff5dcc92 8600Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8601construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8602through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8603able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8604fixed.
8605
8606And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8607patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8608help us to understand.
8609
8610@item
8611A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8612
8613Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8614things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8615@end itemize
8616
8617@node MRI
8618@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8619@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8620To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8621linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8622alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8623described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8624simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8625@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8626linker commands; these commands are described here.
8627
8628In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8629file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8630features to make use of them.
8631
8632You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8633@samp{-c} command-line option.
8634
8635Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8636command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8637blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8638MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8639issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8640
8641Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8642
8643You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8644lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8645The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8646
8647@table @code
8648@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8649@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8650@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8651Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8652the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8653@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8654your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8655script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8656commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8657input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8658@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8659
8660@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8661@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8662Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8663in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8664
8665@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8666
8667@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8668@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8669Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8670@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8671
8672@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8673@item BASE @var{expression}
8674Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8675absolute addresses) in the output file.
8676
8677@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8678@item CHIP @var{expression}
8679@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8680This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8681
8682@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8683@item END
8684This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8685
8686@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8687@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8688Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8689language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8690
8691@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8692@item
252b5132
RH
8693S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8694
8695@item
8696IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8697
8698@item
8699COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8700@samp{COFF}
8701@end enumerate
8702
8703@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8704@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8705Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8706@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8707
8708The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8709same line, with no change in its effect.
8710
8711@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8712@item LOAD @var{filename}
8713@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8714Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8715same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8716command line.
8717
8718@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8719@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8720@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8721MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8722option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8723
8724@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8725@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8726@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8727Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8728order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8729script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8730sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8731file, in the order specified.
8732
8733@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8734@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8735@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8736@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8737Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8738@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8739
8740@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8741@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8742@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8743@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8744You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8745specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8746If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8747@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8748@end table
8749
793c5807
NC
8750@node GNU Free Documentation License
8751@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8752@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8753
370b66a1
CD
8754@node LD Index
8755@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8756
8757@printindex cp
8758
8759@tex
7ca01ed9 8760% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8761% meantime:
8762\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8763\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8764\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8765\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8766\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8767\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8768\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8769\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8770\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8771% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8772@end tex
8773
252b5132 8774@bye
This page took 1.468975 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.